gm owner manualstitle gm owner manuals author eds created date 2/14/2008 1:45:15 pm

Seats and Restraints ......... 1-1Front Seats .................... 1-2Rear Seats .................... 1-7Safety Belts ................... 1-8Airbag System .............. 1-23Child Restraints ............. 1-37

Keys, Doors andWindows ............................ 2-1

Keys ............................. 2-2Doors and Locks ............ 2-5Theft-Deterrent Systems ... 2-7Windows ...................... 2-10Mirrors ......................... 2-12Sunroof ........................ 2-13

Storage .............................. 3-1Storage ......................... 3-1

Instruments andControls ............................. 4-1

Instrument PanelOverview .................... 4-2

Warning Lights, Gages,and Indicators ............ 4-11

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) ............. 4-26

OnStar® System ............ 4-38

Lighting ............................. 5-1Lighting ......................... 5-1

Infotainment ...................... 6-1Audio System(s) ............. 6-1

Climate Controls ............... 7-1Climate Controls ............. 7-1

Driving and Operating ....... 8-1Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ................ 8-2Driving Your Vehicle ...... 8-16Fuel ............................ 8-35

Vehicle Serviceand Care ............................ 9-1

Service .......................... 9-2Owner Checks ................ 9-5Headlamp Aiming .......... 9-26Bulb Replacement ......... 9-28Electrical System ........... 9-33Tires ........................... 9-38

Tire Changing ............... 9-60Jump Starting ............... 9-68Towing ........................ 9-72Appearance Care .......... 9-72

Technical Data ................. 10-1Vehicle Identification ...... 10-1Capacities and

Specifications ............ 10-2

Customer Information ...... 11-1Customer Information ..... 11-1Reporting Safety

Defects ................... 11-13Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy ............. 11-15

Index ................................... i-1

2008 Saturn Astra Owner Manual M

SATURN and the SATURN Emblemare registered trademarks, andthe name ASTRA is a trademark ofSaturn Corporation. GENERALMOTORS and GM are registeredtrademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. Saturn reserves the right tomake changes after that timewithout further notice.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès deconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123helminc.com

Using this ManualRead this owner manual frombeginning to end to learn about thevehicle’s features and controls.Pictures and words work together toexplain things.

ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 94701908 B Second Printing ©2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

IndexTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Cautions and NoticesThere are a number of safetycautions in this book. A box with theword CAUTION is used to tellabout things that could cause injuryif the warning is ignored.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do Not do this” or “Do Not letthis happen.”

Notices are also used in thismanual.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle. Many times,this damage would not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. The notice tells what to doto help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Other manuals may use CAUTIONand NOTICE warnings in differentcolors or in different words.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

Preface iii

✍ NOTES

iv Preface

Seats andRestraints

Front SeatsManual Seats .....................1-2Seat Height Adjuster ...........1-2Lumbar Seat Adjustment ....1-3Reclining Seatbacks ...........1-3Head Restraints ..................1-5Heated Seats .....................1-6

Rear SeatsRear Seat Operation ...........1-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts ........................1-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly ..........................1-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt .............1-17Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy .......................1-21

Safety Belt Extender .........1-22Safety Belt Check .............1-22

Care of Safety Belts .........1-22Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts Aftera Crash ...........................1-23

Airbag SystemAirbag System ..................1-23Where Are the Airbags? ...1-25When Should an AirbagInflate? ............................1-27

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ............................1-28

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ........................1-28

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? ..........1-29

Passenger SensingSystem ............................1-30

Servicing YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ............................1-34

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ............................1-35

Airbag System Check .......1-36Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash .........1-36

Child RestraintsOlder Children ..................1-37Infants and YoungChildren ..........................1-38

Child Restraint Systems ....1-41Where to Put theRestraint .........................1-43

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH) ..........................1-45

Replacing LATCHSystem Parts Aftera Crash ...........................1-50

Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Seat) .....1-50

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat) ...........1-53

Seats and Restraints 1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not wantto. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

To raise and lower the manualseat, move the lever up or downrepeatedly until the seat is atthe desired height.

1-2 Seats and Restraints

Lumbar Seat Adjustment

On seats with this feature, turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thelumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjustthe seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movementcould startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal whenyou do not want to. Adjust thedriver’s seat only when thevehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined positionwhen your vehicle is in motioncan be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when youare reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, notat your pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.


To adjust a manual recliningseatback, turn the knob. Do not leanon the seatback while adjusting it.

Seatback Latches(Three Door Model)For easy entry/exit to the rear seatson three door models:

1. Lift the lever, and tilt the seatbackforward.

2. Lower the lever and move theentire seat completely forward.

{ CAUTION

If the seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sittingthere. Always push and pullon the seatback to be sure itis locked.

To return the seat to the uprightposition:

1. Remove any objects in front of orbehind the seat.

2. Move the entire seat rearward.

3. Lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seatand return the seatback tothe upright position.

4. Lower the lever then push andpull on the seatback to be sureit is locked in place.


Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants willsuffer a neck/spinal injuryin a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so thatthe top of the restraint is at thesame height as the top of theoccupant’s head.

This position reduces the chance ofa neck injury in a crash.

To adjust the head restraint, pressthe button located on the side of thehead restraint. Pull up or push downon the restraint to adjust it.

Try to move the head restraint afterthe button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The vehicle’s front seat headrestraints are not designed tobe removed.


Active Head Restraint System

The vehicle has an active headrestraint system in the front seatingpositions.

These automatically tilt forward toreduce the risk of neck injury ifthe vehicle is hit from behind.

Rear Seat HeadrestsThe vehicle has headrests in allseating positions of the rear seats.The headrests in the rear outboardpositions adjust like the frontseat head restraints.

To adjust the headrest in the rearseat center position, pull up toraise it.

To lower the headrest, press thebuttons located on the top ofthe seatback and push the headrest down.

The vehicle’s rear seat headrestsare not designed to be removed.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls for each seat are locatedon the center of the instrument panel.To operate the heated seats theignition must be on.

M (Heated Seat): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat.

The light on the button will come onto indicate that the feature is working.Press the button to cycle throughthe temperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn theheat to the seat off. The number ofindicator lights above the button willshow the level of heat selected: threefor high, two for medium, and onefor low.


Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

{ CAUTION

If the seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sittingthere. Always push and pullon the seatback to be sure itis locked.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

After raising the rear seatback,always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and arenot twisted.

Folding the Seatback

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

Before folding the seatback down,the safety belt must be unbuckledand not in the storage clip. Thefront seat must be moved allthe way forward, and not reclined.The headrest must be completelylowered.

To lower the seatback:

1. Press the button located on thetop of the seatback to release it.

2. Fold the seatback forward.


To return the seat to the sittingposition:

1. Make sure the safety belt isthrough the storage clip.

2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward until it is locked inthe sitting position.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

4. Remove the safety belt from thestorage clip.

The seatback must be locked oryou will not be able to pull outand use the rear center safetybelt. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things notto do with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where heor she cannot wear a safety beltproperly. If you are in a crashand you are not wearing a safetybelt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things insidethe vehicle harder or be ejectedfrom it and be seriously injuredor killed. In the same crash, youmight not be, if you are buckledup. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that yourpassenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.


{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.Do not allow people to ride inany area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 4-14.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requireswearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will bein a crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.


Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...


or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take theforces. That is why safety belts makesuch good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only infrontal collisions, but especially inside and other collisions.


Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants.If a child will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children on page 1-37or Infants and Young Children onpage 1-38. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be lesslikely to slide under the lap belt.


If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt ifyour shoulder belt is too loose.In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulderbelt should fit snugly againstyour body.


A: The lap belt is too loose.It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in thewrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go upover your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not onthe pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle your belt intothe buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would bemuch too high. In a crash,you can slide under the belt.The belt force would then beapplied on the abdomen, not onthe pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries.Be sure the belt goes under thearmrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injuredif you wear the shoulder beltunder your arm. In a crash,your body would move too farforward, which would increasethe chance of head and neckinjury. Also, the belt wouldapply too much force to theribs, which are not as strong asshoulder bones. You could alsoseverely injure internal organslike your liver or spleen. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.



A: The belt is behind the body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, youwould not be restrained by theshoulder belt. Your body couldmove too far forward increasingthe chance of head and neckinjury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The beltforce would then be appliedright on the abdomen. Thatcould cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulderand across the chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.


{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured bya twisted belt. In a crash, youwould not have the full widthof the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted,make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

Here is how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt properly.

1. Adjust the seat so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.If you ever pull the shoulderportion of a passenger belt outall the way, you may engage thechild restraint locking feature.If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-22.Make sure the release button onthe buckle is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if necessary.


4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety beltin a crash. See “Shoulder BeltHeight Adjustment” later in thissection.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should goback out of the way. When the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plateup the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching onthe safety belt, near the guide loopon the side wall.

Before you close a door, be surethe belt is out of the way. If you slamthe door on it, you can damageboth the belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driverand right front passenger position.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on your shoulder. The beltshould be away from the face andneck, but not falling off the shoulder.Incorrect positioning of the shoulderbelt can reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt.


To move it, push the button on thefront of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster tothe desired position.

After you move the adjuster towhere you want it, try to move itdown without pushing the buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt PretensionersThe vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although you cannot seethem, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tighten thesafety belts during the early stagesof a moderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioner activationare met. And, if the vehicle hasside impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash.

Pretensioners work only once. Ifthey activate in a crash, you will needto get new ones, and probably othernew parts for the safety belt system.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash on page 1-23.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulderbelt, the comfort guide positions thebelt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide for eachoutboard passenger position in therear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from theside of the seatback to removethe guide from its storage pocket.


2. Place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The elasticcord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is notproperly worn may not providethe protection needed in acrash. The person wearing thebelt could be seriously injured.The shoulder belt should goover the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take beltrestraining forces.


4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section.Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that you can take themout of the guide. Push the guide intothe pocket on the side of seatback.

Properly secure the guide loopbefore folding the seatback. Thecomfort guide and vehicle can bedamaged while closing a door if it isnot properly secured in its storagelocation.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Likeall occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they donot wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.


Safety Belt ExtenderIf the safety belt will fasten aroundyou, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer will orderyou an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

Safety Belt CheckNow and then, make sure the safetybelt reminder light and all your belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have itrepaired. Torn or frayed safety beltsmay not protect you in a crash. Theycan rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a newone right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 4-14 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts onpage 1-22.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safetybelts. If you do, it may severelyweaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provideadequate protection. Cleansafety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts Aftera Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even deathin a crash. To help make surethe safety belt systems areworking properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer/retailer to have thesafety belt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4-14.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for theright front passenger and thepassenger seated directly behindthe right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossed inthe trim or on an attached label nearthe deployment opening.


For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel forthe driver and on the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force ofan inflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crashhelps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.

{ CAUTION

Frontal airbags are designed todeploy in moderate to severefrontal and near frontal crashes.They are not designed to inflatein rollover, rear crashes, or inmany side crashes.

Seat-mounted side impactairbags and roof-rail airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderateto severe crashes wheresomething hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designedto inflate in frontal, in rollover,or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicleshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.


{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not situnnecessarily close to theairbag, as you would be if youwere sitting on the edge of yourseat or leaning forward. Safetybelts help keep you in positionbefore and during a crash.Always wear your safety belt,even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back aspossible while still maintainingcontrol of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean onor sleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positionswith seat-mounted side impactairbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

{ CAUTION

Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protectionfor adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly inyour vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 1-37 orInfants and Young Children onpage 1-38.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 4-14for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger’s side.


The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflateproperly or it might force theobject into that person causingsevere injury or even death.The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupantand an airbag, and do notattach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on ornear any other airbag covering.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path ofa seat-mounted side impactairbag.

Never secure anything to theroof of a vehicle with roof-railairbags by routing a rope ortie down through any door orwindow opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

Driver Side shown,Passenger Side similar


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceedsa predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags could inflate ata different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and amore severe frontal impact. Formoderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 1-23.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate ifthe crash severity is above thesystem’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.


Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impactairbag is intended to deploy onthe side of the vehicle that is struck.A roof-rail airbag is intended todeploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest to thedoor. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body.But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Shouldan Airbag Inflate? on page 1-27for more information.Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.


What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 1-28.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyonein the vehicle should get out assoon as it is safe to do so. If youhave breathing problems butcannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a windowor a door. If you experiencebreathing problems following anairbag deployment, you shouldseek medical attention.

In many crashes severe enoughto inflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the rightfront passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect youin another crash. A new systemwill include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 11-15 and EventData Recorders on page 11-16.

• Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag systems. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer forservice.


Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visiblein the rearview mirror when you startthe vehicle.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or thesymbol for on or the symbol for off,will be visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 4-15.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbagsare not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger’s seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in a rear-facingchild restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an olderchild riding in a booster seat; andchildren, who are large enough,using safety belts.

United States

Canada


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped), no systemis fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag(s) are off. If yousecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back asit will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat isunoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

• The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

• The system determines thata small child is present in abooster seat.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

• The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.


When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbags areoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 4-15.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, turnthe vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle andreinstall the child restraint followingthe child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to SecuringChild Restraints (Rear Seat) onpage 1-50 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front Seat)on page 1-53.

If, after reinstalling the child restraintand restarting the vehicle, the onindicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback isnot pressing the child restraint intothe seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatbackand adjust the seat cushion ifpossible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the head restraint.See Head Restraints on page 1-5.

Remove any additional material fromthe seat such as blankets, cushions,seat covers, seat heaters, or seatmassagers before reinstalling orsecuring the child restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, securethe child in the child restraint ina rear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to enable (may inflate)the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passenger’sseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag, depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should weara safety belt properly —whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.


If a person of adult-size is sittingin the right front passenger’s seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,turn the vehicle off, remove anyadditional material from the seat,such as blankets, cushions, seatcovers, seat heaters or seatmassagers and ask the personto place the seatback in the fullyupright position, then sit uprightin the seat, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legscomfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remainin this position for two to threeminutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enablethe right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag.

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information aboutthe importance of properrestraint use.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light inthe instrument panel clusterever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may bewrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size personsitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not havethe protection of the airbag(s).See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 4-14 for more on this,including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion, oraftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.


We recommend that you not useseat covers or other aftermarketequipment other than any that GMhas approved for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-35 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how thesystem operates.

The passenger sensing system maysuppress the airbag deploymentwhen liquid soaks into the seat.If this happens, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator and the airbag readinesslight on the instrument panel willbe lit. The system should resumenormal operation after the seat isallowed to dry. If the system operatesincorrectly after the seat has dried,have your dealer/retailer check thesystem.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere withthe proper operation of thepassenger sensing system.

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how your vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle.Your dealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 11-14.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, anairbag can still inflate duringimproper service. You can beinjured if you are close to anairbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbagsystem. Be sure to followproper service procedures,and make sure the personperforming work for you isqualified to do so.


Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,

which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger’s seat.The passenger sensing systemmay not operate properly if theoriginal seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholsteryor trim, or with GM covers,upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, suchas an aftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of theseat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of thepassenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing Systemon page 1-30.

If you have any questions aboutthis, you should contact CustomerAssistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers

and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of theCustomer Satisfaction Procedurein this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 11-1.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 11-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.


Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 4-14 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, havethe airbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For the locationof the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-28. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash,resulting in serious injury oreven death. To help makesure your airbag systems areworking properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer/retailer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is startedor comes on when you are driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 4-14 for moreinformation.


Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,then return to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatalinternal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow two children towear the same safety belt.The safety belt can not properlyspread the impact forces. In acrash, the two children can becrushed together and seriouslyinjured. A safety belt must beused by only one person ata time.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would notbe restrained by the shoulderbelt. The child could move toofar forward increasing thechance of head and neck injury.The child might also slide underthe lap belt. The belt force wouldthen be applied right on theabdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.


{ CAUTION

Children can be seriouslyinjured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped aroundtheir neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Neverleave children unattended in avehicle and never allow childrento play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate restraints. Children whoare not restrained properly can strikeother people, or can be thrown outof the vehicle. In addition, youngchildren should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone; they needto use a child restraint.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during acrash. For example, in a crash atonly 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb(5.5 kg) infant will suddenlybecome a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. An infantshould be secured in anappropriate restraint.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat.If you must secure aforward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federalmotor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.


{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash,infants need complete support.This is because an infant’s neckis not fully developed and itshead weighs so much comparedwith the rest of its body. In acrash, an infant in a rear-facingchild restraint settles into therestraint, so the crash forcescan be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’sbody, the back and shoulders.Infants should always besecured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones arestill so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may notremain low on the hip bones,as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child’sabdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a bodyarea that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the riskof serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, young childrenshould always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat


A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came withthat child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats


To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-45 for more information.A child can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtaina replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure thechild properly following theinstructions that came withthat child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION


(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If you securea forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-30 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the safety beltsto properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tetherand anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachmentsin your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positionsor child restraints have loweranchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built intothe vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reducethe forward movement and rotationof the child restraint during drivingor in a crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether alwaysto be attached. In Canada, the lawrequires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and thatthe tether be attached. Be sure toread and follow the instructions foryour child restraint.

If the child restraint does not havea top tether, one can be obtained, inkit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

Rear Seat


To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each seating positionwith lower anchors has two labels,near the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

If the top tether anchors arecovered, the top tether anchorsymbol will be located on the coverto assist you in locating them.

The top tether anchors are locatedon the seatback for each rear seatingposition. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating position wherethe child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached. There is no place toattach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 1-43 foradditional information.


Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraintis not attached to anchors, thechild restraint will not be ableto protect the child correctly.In a crash, the child could beseriously injured or killed. Installa LATCH-type child restraintproperly using the anchors, oruse the vehicle’s safety belts tosecure the restraint, followingthe instructions that came withthe child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more thanone child restraint to a singleanchor. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a singleanchor could cause the anchoror attachment to come looseor even break during a crash.A child or others could beinjured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries duringa crash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriouslyinjured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and thesafety belt continues to tighten.Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them.Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restrainthas been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts to avoidrubbing the LATCH attachments.


Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the lower anchors.If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.1.2. Put the child restraint on

the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the

lower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the anchor is covered,

open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and you areusing a dual tether, route thetether around the headrest orhead restraint.


If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route the tetherunder the headrest or headrestraint and in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Replacing LATCHSystem Parts Aftera Crash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer/retailer to have the systeminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatiblewith this vehicle.

If your child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-45 for how to install your childrestraint using LATCH. If you securea child restraint using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-45 for top tetheranchor locations.


Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

If your child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that came withthe child restraint. Secure the child inthe child restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If you need to install more thanone child restraint in the rear seat,be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 1-43.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if necessary.


4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. If you are usinga forward-facing child restraint,you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-45 for more information.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle’s safety beltand let it go back all the way.If the top tether is attached toa top tether anchor, disconnect it.


Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Seat)Your vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restrainton page 1-43.

In addition, your vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 1-30 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 4-15 formore information on this, includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you securea forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-30 for additionalinformation.

If your child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-45 for how to install your childrestraint using LATCH. If you securea child restraint using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-45 for top tetheranchor locations.


Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that thetop strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbag,the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you start

the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 4-15.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. If you are usinga forward-facing child restraint,you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come onand stay on when the vehicleis started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,turn the vehicle off. Remove thechild restraint from the vehicle andreinstall the child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraintand restarting the vehicle, the onindicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback isnot pressing the child restraint intothe seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatbackand adjust the seat cushion ifpossible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the head restraint.

Remove any additional material fromthe seat such as blankets, cushions,seat covers, seat heaters or seatmassagers before reinstalling orsecuring the child restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, securethe child in the child restraint ina rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle’s safety beltand let it go back all the way.


✍ NOTES


Keys, Doors andWindows

KeysKeys ...................................2-2Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System ..........2-3

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemOperation ..........................2-4

Doors and LocksDoor Locks .........................2-5Power Door Locks ..............2-5Rear Door Security Locks ...2-6Liftgate ...............................2-6

Theft-Deterrent SystemsTheft-Deterrent Systems .....2-7Immobilizer .........................2-7Immobilizer Operation .........2-8Content Theft-Deterrent ......2-9

WindowsWindows ...........................2-10Power Windows ................2-10Sun Visors ........................2-11

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ....2-12Outside Mirror(s) ...............2-12Outside Power Mirror(s) ....2-12

SunroofSunroof .............................2-13

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehiclewith the ignition key isdangerous for many reasons,children or others could bebadly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function withthe keys in the ignition andchildren could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught inthe path of a closing window.Do not leave the keys in avehicle with children.

The key, located in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, isused for the ignition and all locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key.Press the button and the keyblade to retract the key.

When a new vehicle is delivered,a key number is included inthe vehicle documents.

Each key number tells yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedlocksmith how to make extra keys.

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keep this number in a safe place.If you lose your keys, you willbe able to have one made easilyusing this number. If you needa new key, go to your dealer/retailerfor the correct key code.

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,contact Roadside Assistance orOnStar. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 11-5 or OnStar®

System on page 4-38.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system operates on a radiofrequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not causeinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range, try this:

• Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle. Stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal. Take a fewsteps to the left or right, holdthe transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery.See “Battery Replacement”later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation

c (Lock): Press to lock the doors,liftgate and fuel tank door.

If the driver door is open, the doorswill not lock.

d (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors, liftgate and fuel tank door.

Press and hold d to lower allthe windows.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach RKE transmitter is uniquelycoded to prevent another transmitterfrom unlocking the vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchasedthrough your dealer/retailer. Alltransmitters need to be re-coded tomatch the new transmitter. The losttransmitter will no longer work afterthe new transmitters are re-coded.The vehicle can have a maximum offive transmitters coded to it.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the RemoteControl Battery check messageappears in the DIC. See “RemoteControl Battery Check” under DICWarnings and Messages (Base andUplevel Systems) on page 4-37.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any ofthe circuitry on the transmitter.Static from your body coulddamage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:1. Extend the key. See Keys

on page 2-2 for additionalinformation.

2. Open the RKE transmitter.3. Remove the old battery. Do not

use a metal object.4. Insert the new battery, positive

side facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Close the RKE transmitter.

SynchronizationAfter changing the battery, turn theignition to ON/RUN. This willsynchronize the key.


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.• Passengers, especially

children, can easily open thedoors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. You increase thechance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So,wear safety belts properlyand lock the doors wheneveryou drive.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock yourvehicle whenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To manually lock or unlock yourvehicle, use the key in the driver’sdoor from the outside to unlockit. When the driver door is openedthe entire vehicle is unlocked. Thereare also window sill knobs thatunlock each door from the inside.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch islocated on the instrument panel.

T (Door Lock): Press to lockor unlock the doors, liftgate, and thefuel tank door.

If the driver’s door is not closedproperly, the power door lock switchwill not lock the doors.

When the vehicle has beenunlocked, the key is not in theignition, and no door is opened thevehicle will automatically lockitself again after one minute.


Rear Door SecurityLocksYour vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edgeof each door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot tothe vertical position.

Liftgate

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to drivewith the liftgate open becausecarbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It cancause unconsciousness andeven death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If you must drive with the liftgateopen, or if electrical wiring orother cable connections mustpass through the seal betweenthe body and the liftgate:• Make sure all other windows

are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating

or cooling system to itshighest speed with therecirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into yourvehicle. See Climate ControlSystem in the index.

• If you have air outlets on orunder the instrument panel,open them all the way.


Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate and lift upto open.

Use the inside pull handle to lowerand close the liftgate.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This willcause the liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

Theft-DeterrentSystemsVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

ImmobilizerThis device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.


This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.


Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The service vehicle soon light,located in the instrument panelcluster, comes on if there isa problem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle. Only the correctkey starts the vehicle.

When starting the vehicle, theservice vehicle soon light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and theservice vehicle soon light flashesthere is a problem with the system.Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start andthe service vehicle soon lightcontinues to flash, try another key.

If the engine still does not startwith the other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start,the first key may be damaged.See your dealer/retailer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideService. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 11-5.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.


Content Theft-DeterrentThis vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is located on theinstrument panel.

Do not use this system if there arepeople in the vehicle. The doorscan not be unlocked from inside thevehicle.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system:

1. Close all doors, windows, hoodand sunroof.

2. Press c on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

The security light flashes when thevehicle is armed.

Disarming the SystemTo disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

• Press d on the RKE transmitter.

• Turn the ignition on.

The security light stays on forapproximately one second when thevehicle is disarming.

How the System Alarm isActivatedTo activate the system if it is armed,open any door, the liftgate orhood. The horn will sound and thehazard warning flashers will flash.

How to Turn Off the SystemAlarmTo turn off the system alarm, doone of the following:

• Press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

• Insert the key in the ignition andturn it on.

The theft-deterrent system isdisarmed when the alarm isturned off.


Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helplessadults, or pets in a vehiclewith the windows closed isdangerous. They can beovercome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in avehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hotweather.

Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehiclewith the keys is dangerous formany reasons, children orothers could be badly injuredor even killed. They couldoperate the power windows orother controls or even make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction and they could beseriously injured or killed ifcaught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children inthe rear seat use the windowlockout button to preventunintentional operation ofthe windows.


The window switches are located oneach of the doors.

To lower a window, press the switchdown. To raise a window, pull theswitch up.

Express-Down WindowThis feature is on all windows.It allows you to lower the windowall the way without holding theswitch down.

Press the front of the switch tothe second position and release.If you want to stop the window asit is lowering, briefly pull up theswitch.

Press and hold the unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to lower all of thewindows from outside the vehicle.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): This buttonis located on the driver’s doorarmrest. Slide the switch forward toturn the lockout feature on. Therear windows can only be opened orclosed by the driver windowswitches. The light on the buttonindicates the feature is in use. Pressagain to turn off.

Sun VisorsPull the visor toward you, or move itto the side to help reduce glare.

To use the lighted mirror, liftthe cover.


Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the mirror in the center to moveit for a clearer view of behind yourvehicle.

Headlamp GlareTo reduce headlamp glare fromvehicles following from behind, pullthe lever toward you. Push thelever forward after the vehicle glareis gone, to return the mirror backto the original position.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeOnStar® control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationon the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System onpage 4-38.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with glass cleaner.

Outside Mirror(s)To maximize the viewing area,adjust each mirror to see the side ofyour vehicle and the area besideand behind your vehicle.

Manually fold the mirrors flat againstthe side of the vehicle by pushingthem toward the vehicle’s doors.

Outside Power Mirror(s)

hi (Power Mirrors): Press toselect the driver side or passengerside mirror. Press the arrows tomove the selected mirror inthe desired direction.


Outside Heated MirrorsThe vehicle may have outsideheated mirrors which help clear thecondensation, snow, and ice.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. See “RearWindow Defogger” under, ClimateControl System on page 7-1 formore information.

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are located in the overheadconsole. To operate the sunroof,the ignition must be turned on.

t Vent/Open: With the sunroof inthe closed position, press to ventthe sunroof. With the sunroof in thevent position, press to open thesunroof. The sunshade willopen automatically with the sunroof.

u Close: Press to close thesunroof. Press and hold to closecompletely.

Sunshade

r Sunshade Open: Press toopen the sunshade.

s Sunshade Close: Press toclose the sunshade, and pressand hold to close the sunshadecompletely.


✍ NOTES


Storage

StorageGlove Box ..........................3-1Cupholders .........................3-1Cargo Cover .......................3-1Cargo Tie Downs ...............3-1

StorageGlove BoxPull up on the handle to open theglovebox. There may be a shelfinside that can be removed by liftingup on the shelf and pulling it out.

Cupholders

There is a cupholder on the frontedge of the rear seat cushion.To open or close, press on thecupholder.There is a cupholder on the rearcenter console.

Cargo CoverYour vehicle may have a cargocover.

To remove the cover, unhook theretaining straps from the liftgate andpull the cover from the side guides.

Cargo Tie DownsThere are four cargo tie-downslocated in the rear compartment ofthe vehicle, that can be used tosecure small loads.

Storage 3-1

✍ NOTES

3-2 Storage

Instruments andControls

Instrument PanelOverviewInstrument PanelOverview ...........................4-2

Hazard Warning Flashers ...4-4Horn ...................................4-4Tilt Wheel ...........................4-4Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever ................................4-4

Cruise Control ....................4-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals .............................4-8

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger ............................4-8

Flash-to-Pass ......................4-8Windshield Wipers ..............4-9Windshield Washer ...........4-10Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................4-10

Accessory PowerOutlet(s) ..........................4-10

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages,and Indicators .................4-11

Instrument Panel Cluster ...4-12Speedometer andOdometer ........................4-13

Trip Odometer(s) ...............4-13Tachometer .......................4-13Safety Belt Reminders ......4-14Airbag Readiness Light .....4-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator ..........................4-15

Charging System Light ......4-17Brake System WarningLight ................................4-17

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light .......4-18

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight ................................4-19

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight ................................4-19

Tire Pressure Light ...........4-19MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ................4-20

Oil Pressure Light .............4-22Low Oil Level Light ...........4-23

Winter Driving ModeLight ................................4-23

Fog Lamp Light ................4-23Exterior Lamps OffReminder ........................4-24

Cruise Control Light ..........4-24Highbeam On Light ...........4-24Door Ajar Light .................4-24Service Vehicle SoonLight ................................4-24

Fuel Gage ........................4-25Low Fuel Warning Light ....4-25

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Driver InformationCenter (DIC) ...................4-26

DIC Operation andDisplays (Base LevelDIC and Audio) ...............4-27

DIC Operation andDisplays (UplevelDIC and Audio) ...............4-31

DIC Warnings andMessages (Base andUplevel Systems) ............4-37

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System ................4-38

Instruments and Controls 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview

4-2 Instruments and Controls

The main components of theinstrument panel are the:A. Exterior Lamps Controls on

page 5-1.B. Outlets. Outlet Adjustment on

page 7-4.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

on page 4-4.D. DIC Operation and Displays

(Base Level DIC and Audio)on page 4-27 or DIC Operationand Displays (Uplevel DICand Audio) on page 4-31 andAudio Steering Wheel Controlson page 6-24. (If Equipped)

E. Instrument Panel Cluster onpage 4-12.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controlson page 6-24. (If Equipped)

G. Windshield Wipers on page 4-9.H. Heated Seats on page 1-6.

(If Equipped)I. StabiliTrak® System on

page 8-19. (If Equipped)J. Driver Information Center (DIC)

on page 4-26. (If Equipped)K. Hazard Warning Flashers on

page 4-4.L. Power Door Locks on page 2-5.M. Passenger Safety Belt

Reminder. Safety BeltReminders on page 4-14.

N. Front Passenger Airbag. AirbagSystem on page 1-23.

O. Fog Lamps on page 5-2.(If Equipped)

P. Instrument Panel Brightness onpage 5-3.

Q. Hood Release on page 9-5.R. Tilt Wheel on page 4-4.S. Horn on page 4-4.T. Ignition Positions on page 8-2.U. Climate Control System on

page 7-1.V. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on

page 4-10. (Covered)W. Audio System(s) on page 6-1.X. Glove Box on page 3-1.


Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Press this button located onthe instrument panel, to make thefront and rear turn signal lamps flashon and off. This warns others thatyou are having trouble. Press thebutton again to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashersare on, the turn signals do not work.

An indicator light on the hazardwarning flasher button comes onwhenever the ignition is turned on.

If the airbags are deployed, thehazard warning flashers turnon automatically. Press thebutton twice to turn them off.

HornPress the horn symbol in the middleof the steering wheel to soundthe horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets thesteering wheel position be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

It allows the steering column to bemoved up or down and in or out.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever

The lever on the left side of thesteering column includes thefollowing:

G : Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals.

2 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger.

J : Cruise Control (If Equipped).

Flash-to-Pass Feature.Information for these features is onthe pages following.


Cruise Control

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can bedangerous where you cannotdrive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruisecontrol on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can bedangerous on slippery roads.On such roads, fast changesin tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and youcould lose control. Do not usecruise control on slipperyroads.

With cruise control, a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more can bemaintained without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can reallyhelp on long trips. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control buttonsare located on the turn signal/multifunction lever on the leftside of the steering wheel.

9 (On/Off): Press and hold thebutton on the back end of the cruisecontrol lever, to turn the cruisecontrol system on or off. The CCon or CC off message will appear onthe instrument panel cluster at theodometer display to show that thecruise control system is on or off.

A J (Set/Accelerate): Pressto set a speed and to acceleratethe speed.

B W (Resume/Coast): Press toresume a set speed and to decreasethe speed.


Setting Cruise ControlFor safety reasons the cruisecontrol cannot be turned on untilthe brake has been applied once.

With automatic transmission, onlyuse cruise control in DRIVE (D).

Press the On/Off button to turn onthe cruise control. A message brieflyappears on the instrument panelcluster at the odometer displaywhen the cruise control has beenturned on.

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise controlon when you are not usingcruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when youdo not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press J and the current speedis stored and maintained.

2. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal. The J indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster turnson after the cruise control hasbeen set to the desired speed.

The cruise control automaticallydisengages under the followingconditions:

• The vehicle speed drops below25 mph (40 km/h).

• The brake is applied.

• The clutch pedal is applied(for manual transmissionvehicles).

• The automatic transmission is inNEUTRAL (N).

• The On/Off button is pressed.

CC On Message

CC Off Message


Resuming a Set SpeedOnce the vehicle speed reachesabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more andthe cruise control is on, press W.The vehicle returns to the previousspeed selected before the cruisewas disengaged.

The stored speed is deleted if theignition is turned off.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold J until the

desired speed is reached,then release it.

• To increase vehicle speedin small increments, brieflypress J repeatedly. Eachtime this is done, the vehiclespeed increase by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) without using theaccelerator pedal.

When the J button is releasedthe current speed is storedand maintained.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold W until the

desired lower speed is reached,then release it.

• To reduce vehicle speed insmall increments, brieflypress W repeatedly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle speeddecreases by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

When the W button is releasedthe current speed is storedand maintained.

Passing Another VehicleWhile Using Cruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenthe accelerator pedal is released,the vehicle will return to thepreviously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. While going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle’s speed. While goingdownhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle’s speed down. Of course,applying the brake turns off thecruise control.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are several ways to endcruise control:• Step lightly on the brake or

clutch pedal.• The automatic transmission is

placed in NEUTRAL (N).• Press the 9 button.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speedmemory is erased when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.


Turn and Lane-ChangeSignalsThe turn signal has two upward anddownward positions to signal a turnor a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down, past the detent.The lever returns to its startingposition when released.

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise orlower the lever until the arrow startsto flash, and then release the lever.Do not move the lever past thedetent. The turn signal willautomatically flash three timesand turn off.

To cancel it before turning, movethe lever slightly in either direction.Do not past the detent.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

23 (Headlamp High/LowBeam Changer): To change theheadlamps from low to high beam,push the multifunction lever towardsthe instrument panel. To return tolow-beam headlamps, push the levertowards the instrument panel againor pull the lever toward you. Thenrelease it.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster is on while the highbeam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassPull the turn signal/multifunctionlever towards you to flash the highbeams from low beam.


Windshield WipersClear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If thewiper blades are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thawthem. If the blades do becomedamaged, install new blades orblade inserts. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 9-21.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload.

The lever on the right side of thesteering column operates thewindshield wipers. Push up or pulldown on the lever to place it inone of the following positions.

[ (High): For rapid wiping cycles.

— (Low): For slow, steady wipingcycles.

-- (Intermittent/RainSense™):See RainSense™ wipers below.

9 (Off): Turns off the wipers.

For a single wipe pull the leverdown from the off position. The leverwill return to its original position.For more cycles, hold the leverdown before releasing it.

RainSense™ WipersThere is a moisture sensor mountedon the windshield next to the insiderearview mirror. When active, thesensor is able to detect moisture onthe windshield and automaticallycontrol the frequency of the wipesaccording to the weather conditions.

To turn on the RainSense feature,the wipers must be set to theintermittent delay setting onthe windshield wiper lever.

To turn off RainSense, move thelever downwards.

Notice: Going through anautomatic car wash with thewipers on can damage them.Turn the wipers off when goingthrough an automatic car wash.


Windshield Washer

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice onthe windshield, blocking yourvision.

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray washer fluidon the windshield. The wipers willrun for a few cycles to clear thewindshield. For more wash cycles,pull the lever forward and hold.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherFor vehicles with the rear wiper/washer feature, it is turned on bymoving the windshield wiper lever.

To turn the rear wiper on or off,push the windshield wiper lever.

To turn on the rear washer, hold thewindshield wiper lever toward thefront of the vehicle to spray the rearwindow.

The rear wiper turns onautomatically when the windshieldwiper is turned on and the shift leveris in REVERSE (R).

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid bottle as the windshieldwasher. However, the rear windowwasher will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If washer fluidsprays onto the windshield but notthe rear window, check the fluidlevel. See Windshield WasherFluid on page 9-20.

For information on replacing therear wiper blades, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement onpage 9-21.

Accessory PowerOutlet(s)The 12-volt accessory power outletscan be used to connect electricalequipment, such as a cellular phone.

There may be a accessory poweroutlet located inside the consolebelow the climate controls.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses.If there is a problem, see yourdealer/retailer for additionalinformation on the accessorypower outlet.


Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to your vehiclemay damage it or keep othercomponents from working as theyshould. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Checkwith your dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsThis section describes the warninglights and gages on the vehicle.

Warning lights and gages can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a problem with oneof the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly whenthe engine is started to indicate theyare working.

Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of thevehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work togetherto indicate a problem with thevehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explainswhat to do. Follow this manual’sadvice. Waiting to do repairs canbe costly and even dangerous.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fastyou are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely andeconomically.

United States Base Automatic Transmission version shown, Canada, Manual Transmission and Uplevelsimilar


Speedometer andOdometerThe speedometer lets you see yourspeed in both miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how faryour vehicle has been driven,in either miles or kilometers.

If your vehicle needs a newodometer installed, the new one willbe set to the mileage total of the oldodometer. If it cannot, it will be set atzero and a label must be put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer wasinstalled. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown.”

Trip Odometer(s)The trip odometer, located at thecenter of the instrument panelcluster, tells how far the vehiclehas been driven since the tripodometer was set to zero.

To reset the trip odometer, hold thereset stem, located to the right ofthe speedometer, for approximatelyone second while the trip odometeris displayed. The engine mustbe turned on.

Service DisplayThe vehicle may have a displayabove the odometer that showswhen service is needed. The numberthat displays with “INSP” is the

remaining distance that can bedriven until service is required.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 9-9 and the index of the SaturnAstra Limited Warranty, Maintenanceand Owner Assistance InformationManual.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute.


Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightThere is a Driver Safety BeltReminder Light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand chime will come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind peopleto fasten their safety belts. The lightwill also begin to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled,neither the light nor chime willcome on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

If your vehicle has this light, it willoperate the same as the Safety BeltReminder Light except that it ismeant for the front passenger.

If the passenger’s safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 1-23.

This light will come on and stayon for several seconds when youstart your vehicle. Then the lightshould go out.


If the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start the vehicle or comeson when your are driving, your airbagsystem may not work properly. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle isstarted, it means the airbagsystem may not be workingproperly. The airbags in thevehicle may not inflate in acrash, or they could eveninflate without a crash.To help avoid injury, have thevehicle serviced right away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. The rearviewmirror has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When you start the vehicle, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the rightfront passenger’s frontal andseat-mounted side impact airbags.

United States

Canada


If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).

{ CAUTION

If the on indicator comes onwhen you have a rear-facingchild restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat,it means that the passengersensing system has not turnedoff the passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped).A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontpassenger’s seat if the airbag isturned on.

{ CAUTION

Even though the passengersensing system is designedto turn off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) if thesystem detects a rear-facingchild restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints besecured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is or airbags are off.

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-30 formore on this, including importantsafety information.


If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system.See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light inthe instrument panel clusterever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may bewrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size personsitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not havethe protection of the airbag(s).See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 4-14 for more on this,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned on, but the engine isnot running, as a check to show thelight is working. It should go outwhen the engine is started.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while thislight is on could drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

Brake System WarningLight

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on.

If it does not come on, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come onwhen the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake systeminspected immediately.

United States Canada


If the light comes on while driving,a chime will sound. Pull off the roadand stop. The pedal might be harderto push or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing YourVehicle on page 9-72.

{ CAUTION

The brake system may not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead toan accident. If the light is stillon after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicletowed for service.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light will come on briefly, as a check,when you start your vehicle.

If it does not, have your vehicleserviced so that the light worksproperly when it needs to.

If the light stays on longer than afew seconds after you start yourengine, or comes on and stays onwhile you are driving, try resettingthe system. To reset the system:

1. If you are driving, pull over whenit is safe to do so. It may takelonger to stop the vehicle.

2. Place the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the ignition.

4. Then restart the engine.

If the light remains on after resettingthe system or comes on again whiledriving, your vehicle needs service.The antilock brakes are not workingproperly and there might be aproblem stopping the vehicle. Pulloff the road and stop. It may takelonger to stop the vehicle. If the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing Your Vehicleon page 9-72 for more information.

{ CAUTION

Your brake system may not beworking properly if the AntilockBrake System (ABS) light is on.Driving with the ABS light oncan lead to an accident. If thelight is still on after you havepulled off the road and stoppedcarefully, have the vehicletowed for service.


StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

For vehicles with this light, it shouldcome on briefly when the ignitionis turned on.

If the light does not come on, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warnif there is a problem.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving there may be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and yourvehicle may need service. When thislight is on, the StabiliTrak systemdoes not assist in controlling thevehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 8-19 for more information.

When the system is active, the lightwill flash while the system helpscontrol the vehicle. You may alsofeel or hear the system working.This is normal.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLightThis light comes on briefly when theignition is turned on as a systemcheck. If it does not, take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer for service.

If this light comes on and stays lit,the engine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and seeEngine Overheating on page 9-15for more information.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause your vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 9-15. Your vehicle couldbe damaged, and it might not becovered by your warranty. Neverdrive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes on briefly as acheck when the ignition is turned on.

This light comes on and stays onwhen one or more of the vehicle’stires are significantly underinflated.


Stop and check the tires as soon asit is safe to do so. If underinflated,inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 9-38 for moreinformation.

This light flashes for approximatelyone minute and then stays on whenthe system detects a malfunction.See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 9-48 for more information.

MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It makes sure thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on briefly, as acheck to show it is working, when theignition is turned to ON/RUN. If thelight does not come on, see yourdealer/retailer.

If the light stays on it indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Heeding the light canprevent more serious damage to thevehicle. This system is also designedto assist the service technician incorrectly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle’s fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thewarranty.

Notice: Modifications made tothe engine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than thoseof the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect thevehicle’s emission controls andcan cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the warranty. Thiscould also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 9-3.


This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds, and restart the engine.If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by doingthe following:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tank onpage 8-37. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel toturn the light off.See Gasoline Octane onpage 8-35.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, have your dealer/retailercheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical problems that mighthave developed.


Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle.Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on or not working properly.

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the OBD (on-boarddiagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle wouldbe considered not ready forinspection. This can happenif the battery has recently been

replaced or if the battery hasrun down. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD systemreadiness, your dealer/retailer canprepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catchesfire. You or others could beburned. Check the oil as soonas possible and have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance may damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned on as a check tobe sure it works. If it does not, havethe vehicle serviced.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.


Low Oil Level Light

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on asa check to let you know that thelight is working.

If this light comes on and stays onwhile the engine is running, it meansyour engine is low on oil. You needto check the oil level as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil on page 9-7for further information.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance may damage theengine. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in thismanual for changing engine oil.

Winter Driving ModeLight

This light will come on when thewinter driving mode feature is in use.

When you turn off the winter drivingmode feature, the light will go out.If it stays on, your vehicle may needservice. See your dealer/retailer.See “Winter Driving Mode” underAutomatic Transmission Operationon page 8-5 for more information.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light will come onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light will go out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 5-2 for moreinformation.


Exterior Lamps OffReminder

This light comes on whenever theexterior lights are off.See Exterior Lamps Controls onpage 5-1 for more information.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever youset the cruise control.The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off or disengaged.See Cruise Control on page 4-5for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 4-8 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

This light will come on when a dooror liftgate is open. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

This light should come one brieflywhen the ignition is turned onas a check to let you know thatthe light is working.

This light will come on if a conditionexists that may require the vehicleto be taken in for service.

If the light comes on and stayson, see your dealer/retailerfor service as soon as possible.


Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage tells you about howmuch fuel you have left, whenthe ignition is on.

When the indicator nears empty,the low fuel warning light will comeon. You still have a little fuel left,but you should get more soon.See Low Fuel Warning Lighton page 4-25 for more information.

The arrow on the fuel gage pointsto the side of the vehicle withthe fuel door.

Here are five things that someowners ask about. These are normaland do not indicate a problem withyour fuel gage:

• At the service station, the gaspump shuts off before the gagereads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the gage indicated.

• The indicator moves a little whenyou turn a corner or speed up.

• The gage goes back to emptywhen you turn off the ignition.

• The vehicle is driven or parked ona grade.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, below the fuel gage,should come on briefly when theignition is turned on as a check to letyou know that the light is working.

This light also comes on whenthe fuel tank is low on fuel. Whenyou add fuel the light should go off.If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.


Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Vehicles with a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can display:

• Time

• Outside temperature

• Date or audio system, if it isturned on

• Trip computer, on vehicles withthis feature

• Warning messages

The type of information and how it isdisplayed depends on the equipmentof the vehicle and the settings of thetrip computer and audio system.

See DIC Operation and Displays(Base Level DIC and Audio) onpage 4-27 or DIC Operation andDisplays (Uplevel DIC and Audio)on page 4-31 and Audio System(s)on page 6-1 for more information.

An F in the display indicates a fault.See your dealer/retailer for service.

Outside Air TemperatureThe DIC shows the temperatureoutside of the vehicle in eitherdegrees Fahrenheit or degreesCelsius. A fall in temperatureis displayed immediately, while arise in temperature is displayedafter a short delay.

On vehicles with the base level DIC,Q displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough tocreate icy road conditions.

On vehicles with the uplevel DIC,“Slippery road” displays.

The road surface may already beicy even though the DIC showsa few degrees above freezing.Adjust your driving accordingly.


DIC Operation and Displays (Base Level DICand Audio)

If the vehicle has the base levelDIC, the following informationexplains how the system works.

Selecting FunctionsFunctions and settings of someequipment can be accessedthrough the DIC. You can use thethumbwheel, if the vehicle has one,or the buttons on the audio systemas described following.

On some vehicles, menu optionscan be selected with the leftthumbwheel on the steering wheel:

1. Turn the thumbwheel down toadvance to the next menu item.Turn the thumbwheel up to returnto the previous menu item.

2. Press the thumbwheel to selectthe menu item.

The available menu options arethen shown in order on the display.

CD 30 with MP3 Player shown, without MP3 Player similar


On some vehicles, if a warningmessage appears, the displayis blocked from other functions.See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-37 for information onacknowledging the message.

System SettingsTo enter the Settings menu:

1. Press SETTINGS on the audiosystem.Audio or System will appear.

2. Press the left arrow button onthe audio system or use thethumbwheel on the steeringwheel, if the vehicle has one,to reach menu item System.After pressing the OK button,the first function of the Systemmenu is shown.

The following functions areavailable:

• Time, setting hours

• Time, setting minutes

• Date, setting day

• Date, setting month

• Date, setting year

• Ignition Logic

• Language selection

• Setting units of measure

Setting Date and Time

To set the date and time:

1. Select time and date from theSettings menu.

2. Make the desired selections.The setting is saved whenthe menu item is exited.

Ignition Logic

If the vehicle has this feature,see Audio System(s) on page 6-1for more information.

Language Selection

To select the display language forsome functions:

1. Select language from theSettings menu.

2. Make the desired selection.

Setting Units of Measure

To select which units of measureare to be used:

1. Select units from theSettings menu.



Trip ComputerThe vehicle may have a tripcomputer. The trip computerprovides information on drivingdata. This information is continuallyrecorded and evaluatedelectronically. If power has beeninterrupted or if the battery voltagehas dropped too low, the valuesstored in the trip computer willbe lost.

To access trip computer vehicledata, do one of the following:

• Press the BC button on the audiosystem.

• Press the left thumbwheel, if yourvehicle has this feature, on thesteering wheel.

Once an audio function has beenselected, the rows of the tripcomputer function are displayed.

The functions are displayed in thefollowing order:

Instantaneous Consumption

This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular momentand will change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).

The metric display changesdepending on speed:

• Below 8 mph (13 km/h), displaysin l/h.

• Above 8 mph (13 km/h), displaysin l/100 km.

This screen cannot be reset.

Average Consumption

This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (l/100 km)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset.

The measurement can be reset tozero at any time and restarted.See “Reset” later in this section.

Trip Consumption

This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (l) of fuelused since the last reset.



Average Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in milesper hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded sincethe last reset of this value.


Distance Travelled

This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km) since the lastreset.


Range

This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi)or kilometers (km) the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.

The message “Range” displaysif less than 31 mi (50 km) can bedriven with the fuel remaining in thetank. The message “Refuel!” displayswhen approximately 19 mi (30 km)can be driven with the fuel remainingin the tank. With less than 19 mi(30 km) worth of fuel remaining therange display will show “- -” oncethe “Refuel!” message has beenacknowledged.

See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-37 for information onacknowledging the message.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining

in the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannotbe reset.

Stop Watch

This display can be used as a timer.

To start or stop the timer, pressthe right arrow on the audio system.

To reset the timer, press the leftarrow until the value returns to zero.

If your vehicle has the leftthumbwheel on the steering wheel,you can start or stop the timerby pressing the thumbwheel.


Reset

The following trip computerinformation can be reset:

• Average consumption

• Trip consumption

• Average speed

• Distance travelled

To reset the value:

1. Select the desired trip computerinformation.

2. Press the OK button on theaudio system, or press theleft thumbwheel, if your vehiclehas this feature, on the steeringwheel:

• To reset the current value,press and hold briefly.

• To reset all values, press forsix seconds.

DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC and Audio)

If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC,the following information explainshow the system works.

Selecting FunctionsFunctions and settings of someequipment can be accessed throughthe DIC.

CDC 40


On some vehicles, menuoptions can be selected withthe multifunction knob on theaudio system:

1. Turn the multifunction knobuntil the desired menu item ishighlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob toselect the menu item.

To exit a menu, turn themultifunction knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to “Return”or “Main”, then press the knob.

Menu options can be selectedwith the left thumbwheel onthe steering wheel:

1. Turn the thumbwheel down toadvance to the next menu item.Turn the thumbwheel up to returnto the previous menu item.

2. Press the thumbwheel to selectthe menu item.

On some vehicles, if a warningmessage appears, the displayis blocked from other functions.See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-37 for information onacknowledging the message.

For each functional area there is amain page (Main), which is selectedat the top edge of the display:

• Audio

• Trip computer, if your vehicle hasthis featureSee “Trip Computer” later in thissection for more information.

For Audio functions, see AudioSystem(s) on page 6-1 for moreinformation.


System SettingsTo enter the Settings menu, do oneof the following:

• Press MAIN, if your vehicle hasthis feature, on the audio system.

• Press the SETTINGS button onthe audio system.

The Settings menu will appear.


1. Time, Date

2. Language

3. Units

4. Contrast

5. Day / Night

6. Ign. (Ignition) logic

Setting Date and Time

To set the date and time:

1. Select Time, Date from theSettings menu.The menu for Time, Date isdisplayed.

2. Select the menu items required.


Language Selection

To select the display language forsome functions:

1. Select Language from theSettings menu.The available languages aredisplayed.


When selected, a r appearsnext to the item.

Setting Units of Measure

To select which units of measureare to be used:

1. Select Units from theSettings menu.The available units are displayed.


When selected, a O appearsnext to the item.

Adjusting Contrast

The vehicle may have this feature.To adjust the contrast:

1. Select Contrast from theSettings menu.The menu for Contrast isdisplayed.



Day / Night

The vehicle may have this feature.The display can be adjusted tobest match the lighting conditions.To adjust this setting:

1. Select Day / Night from theSettings menu.The available options aredisplayed:

• Auto: Adjusts the displayautomatically based onthe lighting conditions.

• Day: Black or colored text ona light background.

• Night: White or colored texton a dark background.


When selected, a O appears nextto the item.

Ignition Logic

If the vehicle has this feature, seeAudio System(s) on page 6-1for more information.

Trip ComputerThe vehicle may have a tripcomputer. The trip computerprovides information on drivingdata. This information iscontinually recorded andevaluated electronically. If powerhas been interrupted or if the batteryvoltage has dropped too low, thevalues stored in the trip computerwill be lost.

The trip computer main pageprovides information on rangeand instantaneous consumption.

To access other trip computervehicle data, do one of the following:

• Press the BC button on theaudio system, if your vehiclehas this feature.


• Select the trip computer menufront display.


Range

This display shows the approximatenumber of remaining miles (mi)or kilometers (km) the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.

The message “Range” displays ifless than 31 miles (50 km) can bedriven with the fuel remaining inthe tank.

See DIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-37 for information onacknowledging the message.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.


For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway,the number may change eventhough the same amount of fuelis in the fuel tank. This is becausedifferent driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces betterfuel economy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Instantaneous Consumption

This display shows the current fueleconomy at a particular moment andwill change frequently as drivingconditions change. This displayshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).

The metric display changesdepending on speed:

• Below 8 mph (13 km/h), displaysin l/h.

• Above 8 mph (13 km/h), displaysin l/100 km.

This screen cannot be reset.

Distance Travelled

This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km) since the lastreset.


Average Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in miles perhour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded sincethe last reset of this value.


Trip Consumption

This display shows the numberof gallons (gal) or liters (l) offuel used since the last reset.



Average Consumption

This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (l/100 km)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset.


Timer

This display can be used as a timer.

Select Timer from the menu.The Timer menu will display.

To start the timer, select Start.

To reset the timer, select Reset.

The desired stop watch displays canbe selected from the Options menu,if your vehicle has this feature:

Driving Time excl. Stops: Thetime the vehicle is in motion isrecorded. Stationary time is notincluded.

Driving Time incl. Stops: The timethe vehicle is in motion is recordedalong with the time the vehicle isstationary with the key in the ignition.

Travel Time: Measurement ofthe time from manual activation,by selecting Start, to manualdeactivation, by selecting Reset.

Reset

The following trip computerinformation can be reset:

• Distance travelled

• Average speed

• Trip consumption

• Average consumption

To reset the value:

1. Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the tripcomputer menu.The information of the twotrip computers can be resetseparately, making it possibleto evaluate data from differenttime periods.

2. To reset, do one of the following:

• Select the desired tripcomputer information.The value for the selectedfunction will be reset andrecalculated.

• To reset all information ofa trip computer, select Allvalues.

After resetting, dashes will displayfor the trip computer informationselected. The recalculated valueswill display after a brief delay.


DIC Warnings andMessages (Base andUplevel Systems)Messages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another.

The DIC monitors some fluid levels,battery of the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter, the theft-deterrentsystem on vehicles with this feature,the brake light switch, and importantexterior lights, including wiring andfuses.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canacknowledge that you received themessages and to clear them from thedisplay by doing one of the following:

• Press the OK button on the baselevel audio system.

• Press the multifunction knob, ifyour vehicle has this feature,on the uplevel audio system.


If there are several warningmessages, acknowledge themone at a time.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they canbe cleared. You should take anymessages that appear on the displayseriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make themessages disappear, not correctthe problem.

Warning messages for the uplevelDIC follow. On the base levelDIC, messages appear in anabbreviated form.

Brakelight check - - -This message displays when thereis a problem with the vehicle lighting.The source of the problem isdisplayed as text. For example,“Brakelight check right”.


Brakelight switch checkThis message displays when thebrake lamp does not come onwhen the brake is applied. Haveyour vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

Coolant level checkThis message displays when theengine coolant level is low. Havethe cooling system serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.See Engine Coolant on page 9-12.

Remote Control BatterycheckThis message displays if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.

Safeguard checkThis message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Have the system servicedby your dealer/retailer immediately.

Washer Fluid Level(Base Level) or WashingWater Level (Uplevel)This message displays when thevehicle’s windshield washer fluid islow. When the washer fluid level islow, the rear window washer systemis deactivated. Fill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir to the properlevel as soon as possible. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid onpage 9-20.

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide you with a wide range ofsafety, security, information, andconvenience services. If your airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services besent to your location. If you lock yourkeys in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can senda signal to unlock your doors. If youneed roadside assistance, press theOnStar button and they can contactRoadside Service for you.


OnStar service is provided to yousubject to the OnStar Terms andConditions. You may cancel yourOnStar service at any time bycontacting OnStar. A completeOnStar Owner’s Guide and theOnStar Terms and Conditions areincluded in the vehicle’s OnStarSubscriber glove box literature.For more information, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar features are availableon all vehicles. To check if yourvehicle is equipped to provide theservices described below, or for afull description of OnStar servicesand system limitations, see theOnStar Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar,the Safe & Sound Plan, or theDirections & Connections Planis included for one year from thedate of purchase. You can extendthis plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions &Connections Plan. For moreinformation, press the OnStarbutton to speak with an advisor.Some OnStar services (such asRemote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance) maynot be available until you registerwith OnStar.

Available Services withSafe & Sound Plan

• Automatic Notification of AirbagDeployment

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/VehicleAlert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench On DemandDiagnostics (if equipped)

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor(U.S. Only)


Available Services included withDirections & Connections Plan

• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisordelivered or OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers to makeand receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling isintegrated into the vehicle, and canbe used with OnStar Pre-Paid MinutePackages. Hands-Free Calling mayalso be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan in the U.S. or a Bell

Mobility service plan in Canada,depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar Owner’sGuide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar advisor by pressingthe OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a featureof OnStar Hands-Free Callingthat uses your minutes to accesslocation-based weather, localtraffic reports, and stock quotes.By pressing the phone button andgiving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the varioustopics. See the OnStar Owner’sGuide for more information (Onlyavailable in the continental U.S.).

How OnStar Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStarservices, your vehicle’s OnStarsystem has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicleinformation. This information isautomatically sent to an OnStarCall Center at the time of an OnStarbutton press, Emergency buttonpress or if your airbags deploy.The vehicle information usuallyincludes your GPS location and,in the event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the accidentthat your vehicle has been involvedin. When you use the Virtual Advisorfeature of OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, your vehicle also sendsOnStar your GPS location so that wecan provide you with location-basedservices.


OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless you are in aplace where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired for thatarea has coverage, network capacityand reception when the service isneeded, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar service.Not all services are availableeverywhere, particularly in remoteor enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar service that involves locationinformation about your vehiclecannot work unless GPS satellitesignals are unobstructed andavailable in that place as well.

Your vehicle must have a workingelectrical system (including adequatebattery power) for the OnStarequipment to operate. There areother problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing service to you atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of your vehicle in an accident,hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone networkcongestion.

Your Responsibility

You may need to increase thevolume of your radio to hear theOnStar advisor. If the light next to theOnStar buttons is red, this meansthat your system is not functioningproperly and should be checkedby your dealer/retailer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing),your OnStar subscription hasexpired. You can always press theOnStar button to confirm that yourOnStar equipment is active.


✍ NOTES


Lighting

LightingExterior Lamps Controls .....5-1Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) ....................5-2

Delayed Headlamps ............5-2Fog Lamps .........................5-2Instrument PanelBrightness .........................5-3

Dome Lamp(s) ....................5-3Entry Lighting .....................5-3Reading Lamps ..................5-3Rear Compartment Lamp .....5-4Battery Run-DownProtection .........................5-4

Lighting

Exterior Lamps ControlsThe exterior lamp control islocated on the instrument panelto the left of the steering wheel.

Turn the exterior lamp control to thefollowing positions:

T (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turnsthe exterior lamps on and offautomatically, depending uponoutside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps

• Sidemarkers

• License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps.

After 15 minutes with the ignitionswitched off and the low-beamheadlamps on, the parking lampsturn on.

Lighting 5-1

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to seethe front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in manydifferent driving conditions, but theycan be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytimerunning lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps turn on ata reduced brightness whenthe following conditions are met:

• The engine is running.

• The light sensor determines itis night and the exterior lampscontrol is in the off position.

• The light sensor determinesit is daytime.

The taillamps and other lamps willbe off.

The DRL turns off when the engineis not running.

The regular headlamps or parkinglamps should be used when needed.

Delayed HeadlampsVehicles with headlamp exit delay,keep the headlamps and taillampson for 30 seconds.

To activate:

1. Turn the ignition off and removethe key from the ignition.

2. Open the driver door.

3. Pull the multifunction levertoward the steering wheel.

To deactivate, do either of thefollowing:

• Insert the key into the ignition.

• Pull the multifunction lever towardthe steering wheel again whilethe driver door is open.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton is located on the instrumentpanel, to the left of the steeringwheel.

The ignition and headlamps orparking lamps must be on to turn onthe fog lamps. The fog lamps will notturn on if the high beam headlampsor flash to pass are active.

Press the button to turn the foglamps on or off. An indicator light onthe instrument panel cluster comeson when the fog lamps are on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to beon along with the fog lamps.

5-2 Lighting

Instrument PanelBrightness

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): The knob with thissymbol on it is located next to theexterior lamps control to the left ofthe steering wheel. Push the knob inall the way until it extends out andthen turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights. Push the knob back inwhen finished.

Dome Lamp(s)There are two dome lamps. The reardome lamp turns on automaticallywith the front dome lamp.

+ (On/Off): Press to turn thefront dome lamp on or off whilethe doors are closed.

Entry LightingWith entry lighting, the interior of thevehicle is illuminated while enteringthe vehicle. The interior lampsturn on briefly when the dooris unlocked using the key or theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter and the ignition is inLOCK/OFF. After a few secondshave passed, the interior lampswill slowly fade out.

Reading LampsFront Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps, located onthe headliner, can be controlledseparately by the buttons locatednear each lamp.

\ (On/Off): Press to turn the lampon or off.

Lighting 5-3

Rear Reading LampsThe rear seat reading lamps can beturned on while the ignition is on.

9 (Off): Press to turn the lamp off.

R (On): Press to turn the lamp on.

Rear Compartment LampThe liftgate lamp turns on when theliftgate is opened and turns offwhen the liftgate is closed.

Battery Run-DownProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if thecourtesy lamps, reading lamps, sunvisor, glovebox or rear compartmentlamp are left on. If any of theselamps are left on, they automaticallyturn off after approximately20 minutes, if the ignition is off.

5-4 Lighting

Infotainment

Audio System(s)Audio System(s) .................6-1Radio(s) .............................6-2Theft-Deterrent Feature .....6-24Audio Steering WheelControls ..........................6-24

Radio Reception ...............6-25Fixed Mast Antenna ..........6-25

Audio System(s)Determine which audio system thevehicle has and then read thefollowing pages to become familiarwith its features.

{ CAUTION

This system provides you withfar greater access to audiostations and song listings.Giving extended attention toentertainment tasks whiledriving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured orkilled. Always keep your eyes onthe road and your mind on thedrive — avoid engaging inextended searching whiledriving.

Keeping your mind on the drive isimportant for safe driving. SeeDefensive Driving on page 8-16.Here are some ways in which youcan help avoid distraction whiledriving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of itscontrols.

• Familiarize yourself with itsoperation.

• Set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radiostations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then,when driving conditions permit,you can tune to your favorite radiostations using the presets andremote control on the steeringwheel. See Audio Steering WheelControls on page 6-24 and theaudio system manual for moreinformation.

Infotainment 6-1

Radio(s)

System Operation

n / R (Volume/Power): Pressto turn the system on or off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

BC (Board Computer): Press touse the Board Computer. See DICOperation and Displays (Base LevelDIC and Audio) on page 4-27 or DICOperation and Displays (Uplevel DICand Audio) on page 4-31.

OK: Press to confirm selectionsand go to the next page in thesettings menu.

\ or ]: Press to change menuoptions.

SOUND: Press to enter the soundsettings menu and go to the nextpage in sound settings.

SETTINGS: Press to adjust systemand sound settings.

Ignition Logic

When this feature is enabled it turnsthe audio system on or off whenthe ignition is turned on or off.

To turn the audio system on or offwith Ignition Logic:

• Press n / R or insert a CDto turn the audio system on.Press n / R to turn the audiosystem off when the IgnitionLogic system is disabled andthe ignition is ON/RUN.

• For vehicles with OnStar®, theaudio system will only turn offif the ignition is OFF and OnStaris not in use when the IgnitionLogic system is enabled.

CD 30 MP3 Shown, CD 30 Similar

6-2 Infotainment

The Ignition Logic is preset to turnoff the audio system when theignition is turned off. To enable ordisable Ignition Logic:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audiodisplays.

2. Press \ until System displays.

3. Press OK until Ign. LogicON or Ign. Logic OFF displays.

4. Press \ or ] to select thesetting. The setting is savedautomatically.

• Press SETTINGS again tomove back one level inthe menu.

• Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, orBC to turn on that feature.

Audio displays and the systemstarts to play if SETTINGS, FM/AM,CD/MP3, or BC is not pressedwithin five seconds after the settingis saved.

System Display

The following information shows onthe system display:

• FM or AM, and the currentstation frequency if the radio isactive.

• The station name displays if RDSis activated.

• AS displays if the AS level isactivated.

• CD displays, and the CD titlenumber or the CD title nameif the CD player is active.

• MP3 displays if the CD is anMP3 CD.

• RDM displays if the CD is beingplayed in random mode.

The most recent selected audiosource plays when the audio systemis turned on and the display is lit.The outside temperature, time,and date display when the audiosystem is turned off and the ignitionis ON/RUN, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4-26.

Audio SettingsThe audio settings can be setfor each audio source and arestored separately for each radiostation and the CD player.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the Bass:

1. Press SOUND until Bassappears.

2. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through +12. Thesetting is saved automatically.

• Press SETTINGS again to goback one level in the menu.

• Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC todisplay that function.

Infotainment 6-3

Audio displays and the audiosystem starts to play if SETTINGS,FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC is notpressed within five seconds afterthe setting is saved.

To adjust the Treble:

1. Press SOUND until Trebleappears.




Adjusting the Sound Settings

There are preset sound settingsdesigned for different types of music

To adjust the sound settingsusing the SOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Soundappears.

2. Press \ or ] to select betweenRock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,Vocal, and Off. The setting issaved automatically.



To adjust the sound settings usingthe SETTINGS button:

1. Press SETTINGS until Audioappears.

2. Press OK until Sound appears.

3. Press \ or ] to select betweenRock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,Vocal, and Off. The setting issaved automatically.



6-4 Infotainment

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)To adjust the Balance using theSOUND button:1. Press SOUND until Balance

appears.




To adjust the Balance using theSETTINGS button:1. Press SETTINGS until Audio

appears.2. Press OK until Balance appears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through +12. The settingis saved automatically.



To adjust the Fade using theSOUND button:

1. Press SOUND until Faderappears.




To adjust the Fade using theSETTINGS button:


2. Press OK until Fader appears.




Speed-Dependant VolumeControl (SDVC)

SDVC automatically adjusts thevolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle increasesor decreases speed while driving.

To adjust SDVC:


2. Press OK until SDVC appears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust thelevel from 0 through 5. Thesetting is saved automatically.



Infotainment 6-5

OnStar® Volume

For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStarVolume is used to set the maximuminitial volume level for the OnStarsystem when it is turned on.

To set OnStar Volume:


2. Press OK until OnStar Vol.appears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through 12. The settingis saved automatically.



On Volume

The On Volume is used to set themaximum initial volume level for theaudio system when it is turned on.

The maximum initial volume level isused only if the volume level beforeturning the audio system off washigher than the maximum initialvolume level set. This will workwhen the audio system has beenoff for at least five minutes and theignition is OFF.

To set the On Volume level:


2. Press OK until On Volumeappears.

3. Press \ or ] to adjust the levelfrom -12 through 12. The settingis saved automatically.



Using the Radio

FM/AM: Press to select betweenFM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,or to listen to the radio while a CDis playing.

RDS (Radio Data System): Pressto identify stations by nameinstead of the radio frequency.

LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Pressto change between LOC ON or LOCOFF. When the LOC function is on,it searches for the strongest radiofrequency. If none is found, itautomatically search for a weakerradio frequency. If no frequencyis found after the second search,the radio returns to the last activefrequency. If a new station search isnot started within one minute, the lowsensitivity (LOCAL) is set when thenext search is started. When LOCOFF is set, a search is carried outusing the high sensitivity (DX).

6-6 Infotainment

Finding an FM/AM Station

1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):Press to play stations that areprogrammed to the radio presetpushbuttons.

SCN (Station Preset Scan): Pressto start station preset scan. The radiogoes to the first preset station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press SCN againto stop scanning preset stations.

\ or ]: Press to find radio stationsusing the automatic station searchor the manual station search.

Automatic Station Search: Useautomatic station search whenthe radio frequency is unknown.

Press \ or ] for more thenone second to have the radio searchfor the next station. Seek is shownon the display and the radio ismuted until a station is found.

If the radio fails to locate a station,the last active frequency is thenreset. When LOC is activated,a search for the next strong stationis made. If it is not activated, itsearches the next receivable station.

Manual Station Search: Usemanual station search whenthe radio frequency is known.

To use manual station search:

• Press and hold \ or ] until thedesired frequency is reached.

• Tap \ or ] until the desiredfrequency is reached.

Setting Preset Stations

The radio can store up to 36 stationsusing the station preset buttons:

• 9 FM

• 9 FM - AS (Autostore)

• 9 AM

• 9 AM - AS (Autostore)

Infotainment 6-7

Radio stations can be storedmanually, and by using Autostore.

To manually store preset stations:

1. Select FM or AM and tune to thedesired radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the ninestation preset buttons, the radiobriefly mutes and displays thepreviously stored station. Thenew station has been storedwhen the radio begins playingagain.

3. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored.

AS (Autostore): Press toautomatically store the ninestrongest stations in the selectedradio band.

To use Autostore:

1. Select FM or AM.

2. Press and hold AS until a beepis heard.

3. The radio begins storing thestations in the nine presetbutton locations.

Using the CD PlayerDisplay Options

The display can be changeddepending on what type of CDis in the CD player. The displayoptions are:

Audio CD without CD text:

• Track number and playing time.

Audio CD with CD text:

• Track title

• Artist name

• Tack number and playing time

• CD name

To change the display:

1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD infoappears on the display.

2. Press \ or ] to select thedisplay type.

3. After about five seconds, theselected display type is saved.

Loading a CD

To load a CD, insert the CD labelside up in the CD player. The CDplayer pulls the CD in automatically.

• The display shows Read CD, theCD symbol and the number of CDtracks.

• When the first track starts to play,the display shows track 1 and theplaying time.

Playing a CD

CD/MP3: Press to play a CD orMP3 CD that is already loaded intothe CD player while the radio isplaying. See “Using an MP3” in theowner manual index.

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track. Press and hold tofast forward or fast rewind withina track and the CD plays at a higherspeed and a reduced volume.

Z : Press to eject a CD, Eject CDis displayed and the radio beginsplaying.

6-8 Infotainment

Random: Press CD/MP3 threetimes to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential order. Press\ or ] to select between Randomon and Random off. RDM shows onthe display when random is in use.

Using an MP3 CDThe CD 30 MP3 is capable ofplaying MP3 CDs that have beenrecorded to a CD-R.

Supported File Structure

The CD 30 MP3 supports up to:

• 99 albums.

• 367 tracks.

• Bit rates up to 256 kbps.

File Naming

Files must be named .mp3 for theCD to work. ID3 tags are supported.The following information showson the display when the CD MP3 isplaying.

MP3 CDs recorded without ID3 tagsdisplay:

• File name

• Track number and playing time

• Album name

MP3 CDs recorded with ID3 tagsdisplay:

• Track title

• Artist name

• Track number and playing time

• Album name


1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD infoappears on the display.

2. Press \ or ] to select thedisplay type.

3. After about five seconds, theselected display type is saved.

Playing an MP3

CD/MP3: Press to play an MP3 CDthat is already loaded into the CDplayer while the radio is playing.

Selecting a Track

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track. Press and hold tofast forward or fast rewind within atrack. During fast forward, theCD plays at a higher speed and areduced volume.

Z : Press to eject a CD, Eject CDappears on the display and theradio begins playing.

Selecting an Album

To select a different album whenthe MP3 CD contains severalalbums:

1. Press CD/MP3.

2. Press \ or ] until the desiredalbum displays.

Infotainment 6-9

Random Mode

MP3 CD can be played in thefollowing random modes:

• Random album: Tracks fromthe selected album are playedrandomly.

• Random CD: All tracks from allalbums are played randomly.

• Random Off: Turns offrandom play.

To use random:

1. Press CD/MP3 three times.

2. Press \ or ] to select betweenRandom album, Random CDand Random Off.

RDM shows on the display whenrandom is use.

Care of CD’s and the CDPlayerCare of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom of the disc.If the bottom of a CD is damaged itmay not play properly or at all. Donot touch the bottom of a CD whilehandling it. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top of theCD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added toa CD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

6-10 Infotainment

System Operation

R (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on or off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

BC (Board Computer): Pressto use the Board Computer, seeDIC Warnings and Messages(Base and Uplevel Systems) onpage 4-37.

[ (Multifunction Knob): Turnto select a menu item, pressto enable or disable a menu item.

\ / ] / _ / ^ (Four-way Switch):Press to select menu options.

SOUND: Press to enter the soundsettings menu and go to thenext page in sound settings.

SETTINGS: Press to adjust systemand sound settings.

Ignition Logic

When this feature is enabled it turnsthe audio system on or off whenthe ignition is turned on or off.

To turn the audio system on or offwith the Ignition Logic:

• Press R or Z to turn the audiosystem on. Press R to turnthe audio system off when theIgnition Logic system is disabledand the ignition is ON/RUN.

• For vehicles with OnStar®, theaudio system will only turn offif the ignition is OFF and OnStaris not in use when the IgnitionLogic system is enabled.

CDC 40

Infotainment 6-11

The Ignition Logic is preset to turnoff the audio system when theignition is turned off. To enableor disable Ignition Logic:

1. Press SETTINGS, SystemSettings displays.

2. Turn the multifunction knob toselect Ign. Logic and pressthe multifunction knob to selector un-select the option.

System Display

The following information shows onthe system display:

• FM or AM displays, and thecurrent station frequency orstation name if the radio is active.

• The station name displayswhen RDS stations are active.

• The station name displays if RDSis activated.

• AS displays if AS is activated.

• CD displays along with the CDnumber, CD track number, CDtitle, artists name or albumname plus track time and trackname, if the CD player is active.

• CD in displays if more than oneCD is inserted.

• MP3 displays if the CD is anMP3 CD.

• RDM displays if the CD is beingplayed back in random mode.

• T displays if Random CD is on.

• U displays if RandomMagazine is on.

• S displays if repeat track is on.

• u displays if Scan CD is on.

The most recent selected audiosource plays when the audio systemis turned on and the display is lit.The outside temperature, time,and date display when the audiosystem is turned off and the ignitionis ON/RUN, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 4-26.

Menu SystemThe audio systems menu containstypes of menu pages:

Selection pages

Selection pages have a selectionmenu on the left side of the screenshowing a preview of the menuitems. Selection pages leadto navigation or settings pages.

Feature pages

Feature pages are menu pages.Feature pages also containmenu items which can be selectedand lead to other navigation orsettings pages. The Tuner menuis an example of a feature page.

Settings pages

Setting pages are menu pageswhere the audio system settings canbe changed.

6-12 Infotainment

Menus

The menus of the audio systemsare structured in levels. The currentmenu level is indicated by verticallines at the edge of the screen.

Selecting from a Menu

The items within a menu areselected by turning the multifunctionknob to move the cursor. The cursorhighlights the menu item beingselected.

To select a menu item:

1. Turn the multifunction knobuntil the desired menu itemis highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob toselect the function or to displayanother menu.

• Selected menu items displayas V or a.

• Un-selected menu items displayas ( or o.

To exit from a menu:

• Turn the multifunction knob tothe left until Return is displayedand then press the knob.

• Press CDC, FM/AM, SETTINGS,SOUND, or MAIN at any time toexit from a menu and use thatfunction.

Selecting the Audio Menu

The Audio menu allows access toFM, AM, CD, and Sound menus.To access the Audio menu fromone of these menus:

Turn the multifunction knob to theleft until Return displays andthen press the knob.

Selecting from a List

Some menus are displayed in theform of lists.

• If the cursor is moved to thetop or bottom area of the display,other list items appear. Ascroll-bar on the right edge of thedisplay indicates the currentcursor position in the list.

• The last list item selected ismarked with an arrow in somelists.

• The name of the list and thenumber of items in it are displayedabove the list.

To select from a list:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilthe desired item is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob toselect the item.

Infotainment 6-13

Overlay Menus

Additional notes and information onthe audio system or other vehiclecomponents may appear onthe display as an overlay in somecases. The current menu is overlaidwith the information box. Somesettings have to be confirmed,others are automatically enabledafter a short time.

Audio SettingsThe audio settings can be setfor each audio source and arestored separately for each radiostation and the CD player.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the Bass:

1. Press SOUND and select theSound menu item.

2. Select Treble - Bass.

3. Select Bass from the menu andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.

4. Press the multifunction knob tosave the setting.

Bass tones are automaticallyadjusted to the driving speed tocompensate for rolling and ambientnoise. The setting cannot bechanged.

To adjust the Treble:


2. Select Treble - Bass.

3. Select Treble from the menu andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


Adjusting the Equalizer

The equalizer allows changes to bemade to seven frequencies.

To adjust the equalizer:


2. Select Equalizer.

3. Select the desired frequency andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


5. Repeat these steps for eachfrequency.

After making changes to theequalizer, the user option in theSound menu is enabled.

6-14 Infotainment

Adjusting the Sound Settings

There are preset sound settingsdesigned for different types ofmusic.

To adjust the sound settings:


2. Select Sound.

3. Select: User, Jazz, Speech, Pop,Classical, and Rock.


Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the Balance:


2. Select Fader - Balance.

3. Select Balance from the menuand turn the multifunction knobto adjust the level.


To adjust the Fade:


2. Select Fader - Balance.

3. Select Fader from the menu andturn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


Adjusting the Sound Position

The sound position for the audiosystem can be adjusted. Thesettings are:

Driver: Adjusts the sound positionfor the drivers seat.

Front: Adjusts the sound positionfor the front seats.

All Positions: The sound isadjusted for all seats.

To adjust the sound position:


2. Select Position and then selectthe desired sound position.


Infotainment 6-15

Speed-Dependant VolumeControl (SDVC)

SDVC automatically adjusts thevolume for road and wind noise asthe vehicle increases or decreasesspeed while driving.

To adjust SDVC:

1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGSand select Volume fromthe menu.

2. Select SDVC.

3. Turn the multifunction knob toadjust the level.


OnStar® Volume

For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStarVolume is used to set the maximuminitial volume level for the OnStarsystem when it is turned on.

To set OnStar Volume:


2. Select OnStar IN.



Start-up Volume

The Start-up Volume is used to setthe maximum initial volume levelfor the audio system when itis turned on.

The maximum initial volume level isused when the volume level beforeturning the audio system off washigher than the maximum initialvolume level set, or if the volume isblow the maximum level.

To set the On Volume level:


2. Select Start-up Volume.



6-16 Infotainment

Using the Radio

FM/AM: Press to select betweenFM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,or to listen to the radio while a CDis playing. The Tuner Menudisplays.

LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Pressto change between LOC ON orLOC OFF. When the LOC functionis on, it searches for the strongestradio frequency. If none is found,it automatically searches for aweaker radio frequency. If nofrequency is found after the secondsearch, the radio returns to thelast active frequency. If a newstation search is not started withinone minute, the low sensitivity(LOCAL) is set when the nextsearch is started. When LOC OFFis set, a search is carried outusing the high sensitivity (DX).

Finding an FM/AM Station

1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):Press to play stations that areprogrammed to the radio presetpushbuttons.

Automatic Station Search: Useautomatic station search whenthe radio frequency is unknown.

The radio is volume is mutedwhile the radio searches for astation with strong reception. If theradio is unable to find a station, itautomatically switches to a moresensitive search level. The radioreturns to the last station playingif it fails to locate a station.

To use automatic station search, doone of the following:

• Press and hold \ or ] untilseek displays.

• Select t or u from the radiomenu with the multifunction knob.

Manual Station Search: Usemanual station search whenthe radio frequency is known.

To use manual station search withthe four-way switch:

• Press and hold _ or ^ until thedesired frequency is reached.

• Press _ or ^ repeatedly until thedesired frequency is reached.

To use manual station search withthe multifunction knob:

1. Select Manual from theTuner menu.

2. Turn the multifunction knob untilthe desired frequency is reachedand press the knob.

Infotainment 6-17

Setting Preset Stations

The radio can store up to36 stations using the stationpreset buttons:

• 9 FM

• 9 FM - AS (Autostore)

• 9 AM

• 9 AM - AS (Autostore)

Radio stations can be stored usingthe station preset buttons, themultifunction knob, and by usingAutostore.

To manually store stations using thestation preset buttons:

1. Select FM or AM and tune to thedesired radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the9 station preset buttons, theradio briefly mutes and displaysthe previously stored station.The new station is stored andthe radio begins playing.

3. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored.

To manually store stations using themultifunction knob:

1. Select the desired radio stationand select Store from the TunerMenu, a list of all storedstations is displayed.

2. Turn the multifunction knob tochoose the location for thestation to be stored and pressthe multifunction knob.

To store stations using Autostore:

1. Select FM or AM and then selectAutostore from the Tuner Menu.

2. The Autostore menu is displayed,and the automatic station storingis started.

3. The nine strongest stations in theselected band are stored to thepreset buttons.

Using the CD PlayerThe CDC 40 is capable of playingCDs, MP3 CD-Rs, and mixed modeCD-Rs that have both audio andMP3 tracks on it.

The CD changer holds a maximumof 6 CDs, and can play smaller3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with anadapter ring.

Loading a CD

To load CDs:

1. Press Z (Eject), theCD-Changer menu displays.

2. Select an empty CDcompartment using themultifunction knob, Pleaseinsert CD now displays.

3. Insert a CD into the slot, ReadingCD displays and a appears nextto the selected position.

4. Repeat Step 2 to loadadditional CDs.

6-18 Infotainment

Display Options

The display can be changeddepending on what type of CDis in the CD player. The displayoptions are:

• Disabled ( o ): Track number,CD number, album numberand playing time for an audio CD.

• Enabled ( a ): CD name,track name, artist name,and album name for an audio CDwith CD text.


1. Select Extras from the CD Menu.

2. Enable or disable the Displaytrack box.

Playing a CD

CDC: Press to play a CD thatis already loaded into the CD playerwhile the radio is playing. TheCD Menu displays.

Selecting a Track

Tracks can be selected using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions.

Selecting a track using the four-wayswitch:

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track within a CD.

Selecting a track using the CDmenu and the t or u function:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilTrack is highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob untilthe desired track is displayed.

Selecting a track using the CD menuand the Track function:

1. Select Track from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired track fromthe menu.

Searching Within a Track

To search within a track using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions:

To search using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold \ or ].

2. Release \ or ] when thedesired point in the track isreached.

To search using the CD menu

1. Select r or [.

2. Select r or [ again when thedesired point in the track isreached.

Infotainment 6-19

Selecting CD

CDs can be selected by:

• Pressing the appropriate stationpreset button.

• Pressing _ or ^ on the four-wayswitch.

• Using the CD menu function.

To use the CD menu function:

1. Select CD from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired CD.

Random Mode

There are two modes for random:

• Random play CD.

• Random magazine.

Tracks on the current CD areplayed in random order for Randomplay CD:

To use Random play CD:

1. Select Extras from the CD menu.

2. Select Random CD, and Tdisplays.

To turn off random:


2. Select Normal, and Tdisappears.

4 tracks per CD are played beforechanging to the next CD for Randommagazine:

To use random for all CDs:


2. Select Random Magazine, andU displays.

To turn off random:


2. Select Normal, and Udisappears.

Repeat Track

The Repeat function repeats thecurrent track. The function canbe enabled and disabled by usingthe four-way switch or the CD menu.

To use repeat using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold _ until S appearson the display.

2. Press and hold ^ until S is nolonger on the display to turnoff repeat track.

To use repeat using the CD menu:


2. Select Repeat Track, S appearson the display.

To turn off repeat using theCD menu:


2. Select Normal, S disappearsfrom the display.

6-20 Infotainment

Scan CD

The Scan CD function scans thefirst ten seconds of each trackon the current CD. The function canbe enabled and disabled by usingthe four-way switch or the CD menu.

To use Scan CD using thefour-way switch:

1. Press and hold _ until uappears on the display.

2. Press and hold ^ until u is nolonger on the display to turn offrepeat track.

To use Scan CD using theCD menu:


2. Select Scan CD, u appearson the display.

To turn off Scan CD using theCD menu:


2. Select Scan CD, u disappearsfrom the display.

Ejecting a CD

To eject a CD:

1. Press Z.

2. Select the desired CD to eject byusing the station preset buttonsor the multifunction knob.

To eject all CDs:

1. Press and hold Z until Eject allCDs displays.

2. Press the multifunction knob toconfirm. The CDs are ejected.

Using an MP3 or MixedMode CDSupported File Structure

The CDC 40 supports up to:

• 253 albums.

• 65,535 tracks.

• Bit rates up to 256 kbps.

File Naming

Files must be named .mp3 for theCD to work. ID3 tags are supported.The following information showson the display when a CD MP3, ora mixed mode CD is playing.

• CD number

• Album name

• Track title and artist

Infotainment 6-21

Playing an MP3 or MixedMode CD

CDC: Press to play an MP3 CDthat is already loaded into theCD player while the radio is playing.The CD Menu displays.

Selecting a Track

Tracks can be selected using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions.

Selecting a track using the four-wayswitch:

\ or ]: Press to go to the next orprevious track within an album.

Selecting a track using the CD menuand the t or u function:

1. Turn the multifunction knob untilis highlighted.

2. Press the multifunction knob untilthe desired track is displayed.

Selecting a track using the CDmenu and the Track function:

1. Select Track from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired track fromthe menu.

Searching Within a Track

To search within a track using thefour-way switch or the CD menufunctions:

To search using the four-wayswitch:

1. Press and hold \ or ].

2. Release \ or ] when thedesired point in the track isreached.

To search using the CD menu

1. Select r or [.

2. Select r or [ again when thedesired point in the track isreached.

Selecting an MP3 or Mixed ModeAlbum

CDs can be selected by:

• Pressing the appropriate stationpreset button.

• Pressing _ or ^ on the four-wayswitch.

• Using the CD menu function.

To use the CD menu function:

1. Select Album from the CD menu.

2. Select the desired Album.

Random Mode

MP3 CDs and Mixed Mode CDs canbe played in random order. Thereare two modes for random:

• Random play CD.

• Random magazine.

To turn off random:


2. Select Normal.

6-22 Infotainment

Tracks play in the following order forRandom play CD:

• MP3 CD: If there are five orfewer albums on an MP3CD, four tracks per album areplayed in random order. If thereare more than five albums onthe MP3 CD, one track is playedper album. Tracks from theselected album are playedrandomly.

• Mixed Mode CD: On a MixedMode CD, the tracks from theaudio part are played firstin random order. Then the tracksfrom the MP3 part are playedas described above.

To use Random play CD:


2. Select Random CD, Tdisplays.

Tracks play in the following order forRandom magazine:

• MP3 CD: If there are five orfewer albums on an MP3CD, four tracks per album areplayed before changing tothe next CD. If there are morethan five albums, one trackper album is played beforechanging to the next CD.

• Mixed Mode CD: On a MixedMode CD, the first of all fourtracks from the audio partare played in random order andthen the system changes tothe next CD. The next time thesystem changes to the MixedMode CD, the tracks fromthe MP3 part are played asdescribed above.

To use random for all CDs:


2. Select Random Magazine,U displays.

Care of CD’s and the CDPlayerCare of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom of the disc.If the bottom of a CD is damaged itmay not play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom of a CD whilehandling it. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Infotainment 6-23

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top of theCD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe audio system is equippedwith an electronic safety system toprevent theft, and only works in thevehicle.

Audio Steering WheelControls

Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

Several functions of the audiosystem can be operated with theaudio remote control buttons andthe rotary control located onboth sides of the steering wheel.

Depending on the vehicle’s features,see the following audio controls:

Z (Rotary Control): Manuallyseek a station by turning to movethe cursor either to the previousor next screen entry. Press toconfirm the selection.

For the DIC (Driver InformationCenter), press the rotary control tocall up the DIC menu. Press toreset the current value. Press andhold for two seconds to resetall of the values.

Y : Press to go to the next presetstation if playing the radio.

Press to go to the beginning of acurrently playing CD or to thenext album on an MP3.

6-24 Infotainment

X : Press to toggle between theradio and CD or MP3 as anactive source for playback.

^ / _: Press the arrows to go backor advance to the previous ornext preset station if playing theradio. Press and hold to scrollthrough the preset stations.

Press to go back or advance onetrack at a time on a CD.

Press to quickly reverse or advancethrough the tracks within a CD.

3 (volume): Turn the rotarycontrol to adjust the volume. Pressand hold to adjust the volumecontinuously.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound,but FM signals only reach about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interferewith FM signals, causing thesound to fade in and out.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged, or it can beremoved. If the mast should everbecome slightly bent, straightenit out by hand. If the mast is badlybent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make surethe mast is still tightened to theantenna base located on the roof ofthe vehicle.

Infotainment 6-25

✍ NOTES

6-26 Infotainment

Climate Controls

Climate ControlsClimate Control System ......7-1Outlet Adjustment ...............7-4

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

OperationThe air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

Air Delivery Mode Knob

To change the current air deliverymode, use the left knob to selectone of the following:

) (Bi-Level): This mode directsair to the instrument panel outletsand to the floor outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

Climate Controls 7-1

Y (Vent): This mode directs air tothe instrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): This mode directs airto the windshield and front doorwindows. To reduce fogging, press# to turn on the air conditioner.The fan must also be on.

W (Defog/Floor): This modedirects air to the windshield, frontdoor windows, and floor outlets.To reduce fogging, press # to turnon the air conditioner. The fanmust also be on.

[ (Floor): This mode directsmost of the air to the floor outlets.

Temperature Control Knob

Turn the center knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside thevehicle.

Fan Speed Control Knob

Turn the right knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed. Thespeed settings can be adjustedbetween 1 (Low) and 4 (High).

When the fan is off, the airconditioning compressor is also off.There will be some airflow fromthe outlets when driving, even withthe fan in the off position.

A (Fan): Select this position toturn the fan off.

Air ConditioningFor vehicles with air conditioning.

# (Air Conditioning): Pressto turn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light insidethe button comes on when the airconditioning is activated. The airconditioning can only be operatedif the engine is on and the fan isrunning.

When the air conditioning is onthe air is cooled and dehumidified.If cooling or dehumidification is notdesired, turn off the air conditioningto save fuel.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let the hot inside airescape, then close them. This helpsto reduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down.

7-2 Climate Controls

For quicker cool down, do thefollowing:

1. Press # to turn on the airconditioning.

2. Select Y mode.

3. Set the temperature knob to thecoldest temperature.

4. Set the fan knob to 4.

5. Open all vents.

Recirculation

^ (Recirculation): Press toturn the recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light inside the buttoncomes on when the recirculationmode is active. This moderecirculates air inside the passengercompartment and prevents outsideair from entering the vehicle.

The quality of the passengercompartment air may decreasesince the amount of outsideair entering the vehicle is reduced.

When the recirculation mode isused without air conditioning, theair humidity increases, and thewindows may fog. Avoid using therecirculation mode during highperiods of humidity or cool outsidetemperatures since this may result inincreased window fogging. If windowfogging is experienced, select thedefrost mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

The rear window defogger will onlywork when the ignition is inON/RUN.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicatorlight inside the button will be litwhen in use.

If your vehicle has heated mirrors,they turn on when the rear windowdefogger button is pressed. Pressthe button again to turn them off.For more information, see OutsidePower Mirror(s) on page 2-12.

The rear window defogger will stayon for approximately 15 minutesafter the button is pressed, unlessthe ignition is turned off.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Climate Controls 7-3

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheel below the airoutlets to change the direction of theair flow. Use the vertical thumbwheelnext to the outlets to control theamount of air flow or to shut off theairflow completely.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or

leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

• Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehiclemore effectively.

• If fogging reoccurs while in ventor bi-level modes with mildtemperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the air conditionerto reduce windshield fogging.

7-4 Climate Controls

Driving andOperating

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-In .........8-2Ignition Positions ................8-2Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .....................8-3

Starting the Engine .............8-3Engine Heater ....................8-4Automatic TransmissionOperation ..........................8-5

Manual TransmissionOperation ..........................8-9

Parking Brake ...................8-10Shifting Into Park ..............8-11Shifting Out of Park ..........8-13Parking the Vehicle ...........8-13

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn ........................8-13

Engine Exhaust .................8-14Running the VehicleWhile Parked ..................8-14

Driving Your VehicleDefensive Driving ..............8-16Drunk Driving ....................8-16Control of a Vehicle ..........8-17Braking .............................8-17Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) .................8-18

StabiliTrak® System ..........8-19Steering ............................8-20Off-Road Recovery ............8-22Passing .............................8-23Loss of Control .................8-23Driving at Night .................8-24Driving in Rain and onWet Roads ......................8-25

Before Leaving on aLong Trip ........................8-26

Highway Hypnosis .............8-26Hill and MountainRoads .............................8-26

Winter Driving ...................8-27If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow ..........................8-29

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out .......................8-30

Loading the Vehicle ..........8-30

FuelFuel ..................................8-35Gasoline Octane ...............8-35Gasoline Specifications .....8-35California Fuel ..................8-35Additives ...........................8-36Fuels in ForeignCountries ........................8-36

Filling the Tank .................8-37Filling a Portable FuelContainer ........................8-38

Driving and Operating 8-1

Starting andOperating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the longrun if you follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshiftingto brake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brake linings.

Following break-in, enginespeed and load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

Use the key to turn the ignitionswitch to four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key,make sure it is all the way in, andturn it only with your hand. If thekey cannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer/retailer.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in the ON/RUN positionand the regular brake pedal mustbe applied.

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the onlyposition from which you can removethe key. This locks the steeringwheel, ignition and automatictransmission.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustbe in P (Park) to turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK/OFF position.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with your wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel fromright to left while turning the key toSTEERING UNLOCK/IGNITIONOFF. If this doesn’t work, then thevehicle needs service.

8-2 Driving and Operating

B (STEERING UNLOCKED/IGNITION OFF): This positionunlocks the steering wheel.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, as well as to displaysome warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if youleave the key in the ON/RUN positionwith the engine off. You may not beable to start the vehicle if the batteryis allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This position startsthe engine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving. A warning tone will soundwhen the driver door is opened andthe key is in the ignition.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The power windows and mirrorsmay be used for up to five minutesafter the key is turned to LOCK/OFF.

The power windows and mirrors willnot operate after any of the frontdoors are opened.

The radio may be used for up tosixty minutes after the key is turnedto LOCK/OFF.

Starting the EngineAutomatic TransmissionMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restartwhen you are already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if your vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal to thefloor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.


Your vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not startand the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch toSTEERING UNLOCKED/IGNITION OFF or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain the

battery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for upto a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to let the cranking motorcool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not,the engine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-upin cold weather conditions at orbelow − 4°F (− 20°C). Vehicles withan engine heater should be pluggedin at least four hours before starting.


To Use the Engine Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. The engine heater connector islocated in the passenger sidelower front grille. Open the coverand insert the 110-volt ACadapter delivered in the vehiclesglove box.

3. Plug the other end of the adapterinto a grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause afire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into aproperly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwill not reach, use a heavy-dutythree-prong extension cordrated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug both ends ofthe adapter and store the adapterto prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailerin the area where you will be parkingthe vehicle for the best adviceon this.

Automatic TransmissionOperation

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever islocated on the console betweenthe seats.

Your vehicle may also have anelectronic shift position indicator thatdisplays the position of the shiftlever. This indicator is located abovethe trip odometer on the instrumentpanel cluster.


PARK (P): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when the engine is startedbecause your vehicle cannotmove easily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sureyour vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly levelground, always set your parkingbrake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into Parkon page 8-11.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inPARK (P) before starting the engine.Your vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brakes must beapplied before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition key is inON/RUN. If you cannot shift out ofPARK (P) while holding the brakepedal down, see Shifting Out ofPark on page 8-13.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out on page 8-30.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position,the engine does not connect with thewheels. To restart while you arealready moving, use NEUTRAL (N)only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N)when your vehicle is being towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear whilethe engine is running at highspeed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brakepedal, the vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could losecontrol and hit people orobjects. Do not shift into adrive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.


Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

DRIVE (D): This position is fornormal driving.

Notice: If your vehicle seems tostart up rather slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, and youcontinue to drive your vehicle thatway, you could damage thetransmission. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

THIRD (3): This position is alsoused for normal driving, however, itoffers more power and lower fueleconomy than DRIVE (D). Here aresome times you might chooseTHIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D):

• When driving on hilly, windingroads.

• When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position givesyou more power but lower fueleconomy. Use SECOND (2) on hills.It can help control the vehicles speedas you go down steep mountainroads, but then you would also wantto use your brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in FIRST (1) formore than 25 miles (40 km) or atspeeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)may damage the transmission.Also, shifting into FIRST (1) atspeeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) insteadof FIRST (1).

FIRST (1): This position gives youeven more power but lower fueleconomy than SECOND (2). Use iton very steep hills, or in deep snowor mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1), the transmission does notshift into first gear until the vehicle isgoing slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by yourwarranty. If you are stuck, donot spin the tires. When stoppingon a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.


Winter Driving ModeThis feature helps you accelerate inslippery driving conditions by usingTHIRD (3) gear when you begin toaccelerate from a stopped position.

The winter driving mode button islocated on the center console.

Press once to turn on the winterdriving mode feature. The vehiclewill be in THIRD (3) gear when thevehicle begins to move. Once thevehicle is moving, the vehicle willupshift normally.

The Winter Driving Mode is turnedoff by one of the following:

• Pressing the winter driving modebutton again.

• Manually shifting to SECOND (2)or FIRST (1) gear.

• Turning off the ignition.

This light on the instrument panelcluster will come on when the winterdriving mode is active.

To protect the transmission,the winter program turns offautomatically at high transmissionoil temperatures.

Automatic Neutral IdleThe Automatic Neutral Idle shiftfunction automatically sets thetransmission to NEUTRAL (N) toreduce fuel consumption whenthe vehicle is not moving.

Automatic neutral is activated whenALL of the following occurs:

• The selector lever is inDRIVE (D), THIRD (3),SECOND (2) or FIRST (1) gear.

• The foot brake is pressed.

• The vehicle is stopped.

• The accelerator pedal is notpressed.

• The transmission fluidtemperature is greater than0° C (32° F).

• The road is not steeper than 15°.


When you release the brake with thetransmission in gear, you may feelthe transmission shift from Neutral toDrive automatically. You may alsofeel the transmission shift from Driveto Neutral when the brake is applied.This is normal operation of theautomatic transmission.

Downhill Grade AssistWhen traveling down steep gradesyour transmission may automaticallydownshift into a lower gear when thebrake is applied. You may feel thisdownshift. This performance featureof your automatic transmissionassists with engine braking to reducewear on your brake system. This isnormal operation of the automatictransmission.

Performance On DemandThis feature allows the driver toautomatically force a downshift,when traveling at speeds less thanapproximately 70 mph (112 km/h),by fully pressing the acceleratorpedal.

Manual TransmissionOperationFive-Speed

This is the shift pattern.

Here is how to operate your manualtransmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedaland shift into FIRST (1). Then,slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) whenyou are going less than 20 mph(32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto FIRST (1), put the shift lever inNEUTRAL (N) and let up on theclutch. Press the clutch pedal backdown. Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutchpedal as you let up on theaccelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) andFIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3),FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), thesame way you do for SECOND (2).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL (N).

NEUTRAL (N): Use this positionwhen you start or idle your engine.

REVERSE (R): With the vehiclestationary, wait three seconds afterdeclutching and pull up on thebutton on the selector leverto engage reverse gear.


If reverse gear does not engage, setthe selector lever in neutral, andrelease the clutch pedal. Press theclutch pedal again and repeatthe gear selection.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), alongwith the parking brake, to park yourvehicle.

Shift Speeds

{ CAUTION

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. Youcould injure yourself or others.Do not shift down more thanone gear at a time when youdownshift.

Parking Brake

The parking brake is locatedbetween the driver and passengerseats.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until youcan press the release button. Holdthe release button in as you movethe brake lever all the way down.


A warning chime will sound anda brake warning light located on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon, if the parking brake is set,the ignition is on and the vehiclespeed is greater than 5 mph(8 km/h).

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat thebrake system and causepremature wear or damageto brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warninglight is off before driving.

Shifting Into Park

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get outof your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You orothers could be injured. To besure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps thatfollow.

1. Hold the brake pedal downwith your right foot and setthe parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 8-10 for moreinformation.

2. Move the shift lever intoPARK (P) by holding in the buttonon the shift lever and pushing theshift lever all the way toward thefront of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leaveyour vehicle with the ignitionkey in your hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).


Leaving Your Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if youleave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat andeven catch fire. You or otherscould be injured. Do not leavethe vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave your vehiclewith the engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved theshift lever into PARK (P), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then, seeif you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pushingthe button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inPARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift your transmission intoPARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P).

This is called torque lock. To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properlybefore you leave the driver’s seat.To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark on page 8-11.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of PARK (P) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehiclepush your vehicle a little uphill totake some of the pressure from theparking pawl in the transmission,so you can pull the shift lever out ofPARK (P).


Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. The shiftlock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inPARK (P) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of PARK (P), unlessthe ignition is in the ON/RUNposition and the regular brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.

If your vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 9-68 for more information.

To shift out of PARK (P) use thefollowing sequence:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofPARK (P):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from PARK (P), consult yourdealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service.

Parking the VehicleBefore you get out of your vehicle,move the shift lever into FIRST (1) orREVERSE (R) and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into FIRST (1) orREVERSE (R) with the clutch pedalpressed in, you can turn the ignitionoff and release the clutch.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn couldtouch hot exhaust parts underyour vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, drygrass, or other things thatcan burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust can kill. Itcontains the gas carbonmonoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust comingin if:• The exhaust system sounds

strange or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty

underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in

a collision.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Your vehicle was damagedwhen driving over highpoints on the road or overroad debris.

• Repairs were not donecorrectly.

• Your vehicle or the exhaustsystem has been modifiedimproperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust iscoming into your vehicle:• Drive it only with all the

windows down to blow outany CO.

• Have your vehicle fixedimmediately.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Idling the engine with theclimate control system offcould allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See theearlier caution under EngineExhaust on page 8-14.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

Also, idling in a closed-in placecan let deadly carbon monoxide(CO) into your vehicle even if theclimate control fan is at thehighest setting. One placethis can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can comein easily. NEVER park in agarage with the engine running.

Also see “If You Are Caught in aBlizzard” under Winter Drivingon page 8-27.

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get outof your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to.If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly levelground, always set the parkingbrake and move the shift leverto PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sureyour vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 8-11.


Driving Your Vehicle

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” Thefirst step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt, see SafetyBelts on page 1-8.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready. In addition:• Allow enough following

distance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if youdrive after drinking. Do notdrink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.


Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cord, or heart.This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems helpto control your vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofyour vehicle.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect your vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 9-3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 4-17.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. First, youhave to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Thenyou have to bring up your foot anddo it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as longas two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourthsof a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking.If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.


If your vehicle’s engine ever stopswhile you are driving, brake normallybut do not pump the brakes. If youdo, the pedal could get harder topush down. If the engine stops, youwill still have some power brakeassist. But you will use it when youbrake. Once the power assist is usedup, it can take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.


Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)Your vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine andbegin to drive away, ABS will checkitself. You might hear a momentarymotor or clicking noise while thistest is going on, and you might evennotice that the brake pedal moves alittle. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS,this warning light will stay on.See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 4-18.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes andcontinue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down. If one ofthe wheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separatelywork the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brakepressure faster than any driver could.The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire androad conditions. This can help yousteer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As you brake, the computer keepsreceiving updates on wheel speedand controls braking pressureaccordingly.


Remember: ABS does not changethe time you need to get your footup to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle in front ofyou, you will not have time to applythe brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even thoughyou have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly andlet antilock work for you. You mighthear the antilock pump or motoroperate, and feel the brakepedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpyou more than even the very bestbraking.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may have StabiliTrakwhich combines antilock brake,traction and stability control systemsand helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehiclein most driving conditions.

When you first start your vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.You may hear or feel the systemworking. This is normal and does notmean there is a problem with yourvehicle. The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph(32 km/h).

The system monitors vehiclemovements, and helps the drivermaintain control of the vehicle inmost driving situations. When thevehicle’s stability is affected theengine output is reduced, and thebrakes are applied to individualwheels.

When you turn the ignition on,this light on the instrument panelcluster will come on for a fewseconds, then go out when thesystem is ready.

You may also feel or hear thesystem working; this is normal.

StabiliTrak is automatically enabledwhenever you start your vehicle.To assist the driver with vehicledirectional control, especially inslippery road conditions, you shouldalways leave the system on. But, youcan turn it off if you ever need to.


It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” your vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spinis required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 8-29.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.The light on the instrument panelcluster will be on solid to warnthe driver that StabiliTrak is disabledand requires service. If the problemdoes not clear after restartingthe vehicle, you should see yourdealer/retailer for service.

The g switch is located on theinstrument panel below the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

To turn off StabiliTrak, press andhold the g switch until the light in theswitch illuminates.

To turn StabiliTrak on again, pressthe g switch again or restart thevehicle.

A light in the switch should comeon briefly when the ignition keyis turned to ON/RUN as a checkto let you know that the lightis working.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect your vehicle’sperformance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 9-3 formore information.

SteeringIf the engine stalls while youare driving, the power steering assistsystem should continue to operateuntil you are able to stop thevehicle. If you lose power steeringassist because the power steeringsystem is not functioning, youcan steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel ineither direction several times until itstops, or hold the steering wheel inthe stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice areduced amount of power steeringassist. The normal amount of powersteering assist should return shortlyafter a few normal steeringmovements.

The power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If yoususpect steering system problemsand/or the Service Vehicle Soon lightcomes on, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.


Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control”accidents mentioned on the newshappen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner,each of us is subject to the samelaws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tiresagainst the road surface makes itpossible for the vehicle to change itspath when you turn the front wheels.If there is no traction, inertia willkeep the vehicle going in the samedirection. If you have ever tried tosteer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

Traction in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires andthe road surface, the angle at whichthe curve is banked, and yourspeed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steeringthrough a sharp curve. Thenyou suddenly accelerate. Bothcontrol systems — steeringand acceleration — have to dotheir work where the tires meetthe road. Adding the suddenacceleration can demand too muchof those places. You can losecontrol. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 8-19.

What should you do if this everhappens? Ease up on the brakeor accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go,and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warnthat you should adjust your speed.Of course, the posted speeds arebased on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorableconditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce speed whenapproaching a curve, do it beforeyou enter the curve, while the frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintaina reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate until you are out of thecurve, and then accelerate gentlyinto the straightaway.



Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls out from nowhere,or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front ofyou. You can avoid these problemsby braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there isnot room. That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around theproblem.

Your vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. Firstapply the brakes. See Braking onpage 8-17. It is better to removeas much speed as you can from apossible collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheelat the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wearsafety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYour vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddlesthe edge of the pavement.


Turn the steering wheel 3 to5 inches (about one-eighth turn)until the right front tire contacts thepavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on atwo-lane road can be dangerous.To reduce the risk of dangerwhile passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect a successfulpass. If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavementmarkings, and lines that couldindicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid ordouble-solid line on yourside of the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass. Doing so canreduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slowvehicle.

• When you are being passed, easeto the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens whenthe three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — donot have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspondto your vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In the steeringor cornering skid, too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tires toslip and lose cornering force. Andin the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid is best handledby easing your foot off of theaccelerator pedal.


If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steeringquickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,you want to slow down andadjust your driving to theseconditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance is longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. Youmight not realize the surface is

slippery until your vehicle isskidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water,ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — andslow down when you have anydoubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerousthan day driving because somedrivers are likely to be impaired — byalcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare byadjusting the inside rearviewmirror.

• Slow down and keep more spacebetween you and other vehiclesbecause headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly intoapproaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glasson your vehicle clean — insideand out.

• Keep your eyes moving,especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night asin the daytime. But, as we getolder, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might needat least twice as much light to seethe same thing at night as a20-year-old.


Driving in Rain and onWet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Flowing or rushing watercreates strong forces. Drivingthrough flowing water couldcause your vehicle to becarried away. If this happens,you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying todrive through flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle’stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 9-38.

• Turn off cruise control, ifequipped.


Before Leaving on aLong TripTo prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, consider having it serviced byyour dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your owninclude:

• Windshield Washer Fluid:Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Alllevels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and arelenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tiresinflated to recommendedpressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe totravel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift down tolet the engine assist the brakeson a steep downhill slope.


{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes willhave to do all the work ofslowing down and they couldget so hot that they would notwork well. You would then havepoor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You couldcrash. Always have the enginerunning and the vehicle in gearwhen going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winterdriving:

• Have your vehicle in good shapefor winter.

• You might want to put winteremergency supplies in yourvehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a smallbrush or broom, a supply ofwindshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel,a flashlight, a red cloth, and reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will bedriving under severe conditions,include a small bag of sand, a piece

of old carpet, or a couple of burlapbags to help provide traction. Be sureyou properly secure these items inyour vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 9-38.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those placeswhere the tires meet the roadprobably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or icebetween the tires and the road, youcan have a very slippery situation.You have a lot less traction, or grip,and need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wetice. Very cold snow or ice can beslick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because itcan offer the least traction of all.


You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezingrain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smoothice, packed, blowing, or loosesnow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not tobreak the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though youhave ABS, begin stopping sooner

than you would on dry pavement.See Antilock Brake System(ABS) on page 8-18.

• Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. Theroad might be fine until you hita spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, icepatches can appear in shadedareas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or underbridges. Sometimes the surfaceof a curve or an overpass canremain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patchof ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brakewhile you are actually on the ice,and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavysnow, you could be in a serioussituation. You should probablystay with your vehicle unless youknow for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to doto summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle toalert police that you have beenstopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap ablanket around you. If you do nothave blankets or extra clothing,make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats — anything you canwrap around yourself or tuckunder your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keepwarm, but be careful.


{ CAUTION

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you andkill you. You cannot see it orsmell it, so you might not knowit is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base ofyour vehicle, especially anythat is blocking the exhaustpipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.

Open a window just a little onthe side of the vehicle that isaway from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as youmust. This saves fuel. When you runthe engine, make it go a little fasterthan just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses lessfuel for the heat that you get and itkeeps the battery charged. You willneed a well-charged battery torestart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with theheadlamps. Let the heater runfor a while.

Then, shut the engine off and closethe window almost all the way topreserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only whenyou feel really uncomfortable fromthe cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as longas you can. To help keep warm,you can get out of the vehicle anddo some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until helpcomes.

If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get ItOut on page 8-30.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tiresspin at high speed, they canexplode, and you or otherscould be injured. The vehiclecan overheat, causing anengine compartment fire orother damage. Spin the wheelsas little as possible and avoidgoing above 35 mph (55 km/h)as shown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 9-59.


Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any stabilitysystem. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 8-19. Then shift back and forthbetween REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, or with a manualtransmission, between FIRST (1) orSECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.

Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal whenthe transmission is in gear. By slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you willcause a rocking motion that couldfree your vehicle. If that does not getyour vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If yourvehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle onpage 9-72.

Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.


{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rearGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. Thesecould cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to the vehicle’scenter pillar (B-pillar). With thedriver’s door open, you willfind the label attached belowthe door lock post. The Tire

and Loading Information labelshows the number of occupantseating positions (A), andthe maximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms andpounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires andinflation see Tires on page 9-38and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-46.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Label Example


Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit1. Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”on your vehicle placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs and there willbe five 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage andcargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferredto your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.

The vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs(317 kg).

Example 1



B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs(340 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg).


B. Subtract OccupantWeight 200 lbs(91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to the vehicle’s Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about the

vehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certificationlabel, found on the rear edgeof the driver’s door, tells youthe gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

Example 2 Example 3

Label Example


The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for your vehicle,or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier inthis section.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it canchange the way your vehiclehandles. These could causeyou to lose control andcrash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of thevehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or ifthere is a crash, they willkeep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.• Put things in the trunk of

your vehicle. In a trunk,put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

• Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

• When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.


FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of your vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as sparkknock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as

soon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives onpage 8-36 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and your vehiclemight fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 4-20. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are now requiredto contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly.In most cases, you should not haveto add anything to the fuel. However,some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive requiredto meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean, or if your vehicleexperiences problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Also, yourdealer/retailer has additives thatwill help correct and prevent mostdeposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area.

We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under yourwarranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.

Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turnon. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of improper fuel would notbe covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business inthe country where you will bedriving.


Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when youare refueling. Do not smoke ifyou are near fuel or refuelingyour vehicle. Do not use cellularphones. Keep sparks, flames,and smoking materials awayfrom fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; neverlet children pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located behind ahinged fuel door on the passengerside of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

The fuel cap has a spring in it,if the cap is released too soon itwill spring back.

{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you ifyou open the fuel cap tooquickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, youcould be badly burned. Thisspray can happen if your tankis nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuelcap slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See ExteriorCleaning on page 9-75.


When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 4-20.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/retailer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This maycause your malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 4-20.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuelcontainer while it is in yourvehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the containercan ignite the fuel vapor.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

You can be badly burned andyour vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:• Dispense fuel only into

approved containers.• Do not fill a container while

it is inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside of thefill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.


Vehicle Serviceand Care

ServiceService ...............................9-2Accessories andModifications .....................9-3

California Proposition 65Warning ............................9-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements .....9-3

Doing Your OwnService Work ....................9-4

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ......9-4

Owner ChecksOwner Checks ....................9-5Hood Release .....................9-5Engine CompartmentOverview ...........................9-6

Engine Oil ..........................9-7Engine Oil Life System .......9-9Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....9-11

Automatic TransmissionFluid ................................9-12

Manual TransmissionFluid ................................9-12

Hydraulic Clutch ................9-12Engine Coolant .................9-12Pressure Cap ....................9-15Engine Overheating ...........9-15Cooling System .................9-16Power Steering Fluid .........9-20Windshield Washer Fluid ....9-20Windshield Wiper BladeReplacement ...................9-21

Brakes ..............................9-22Battery ..............................9-25

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ..............9-26

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement .............9-28Halogen Bulbs ..................9-28Front Turn Signal Lamps ...9-28Taillamps(Five-Door Hatchback) .....9-29

Taillamps(Three-Door Hatchback) ...9-30

License Plate Lamp ..........9-32Replacement Bulbs ...........9-33

Electrical SystemAdd-On ElectricalEquipment .......................9-33

Headlamp Wiring ..............9-33Windshield Wiper Fuses ....9-34Power Windows andOther Power Options .......9-34

Fuses ...............................9-34Engine CompartmentFuse Block ......................9-34

Rear CompartmentFuse Block ......................9-36

TiresTires .................................9-38Winter Tires ......................9-39Tire Sidewall Labeling .......9-40Tire Terminology andDefinitions .......................9-43

Inflation - Tire Pressure ....9-46High-Speed Operation .......9-47Tire Pressure MonitorSystem ............................9-48

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation ........................9-50

Tire Inspection andRotation ..........................9-51

When It Is Time forNew Tires .......................9-53

Vehicle Service and Care 9-1

Buying New Tires .............9-54Different Size Tiresand Wheels .....................9-55

Uniform Tire QualityGrading ...........................9-56

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance ....................9-58

Wheel Replacement ..........9-58Tire Chains .......................9-59

Tire ChangingIf a Tire Goes Flat ............9-60Changing a Flat Tire .........9-60Removing the SpareTire and Tools .................9-61

Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire .......................9-62

Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools .................9-66

Compact Spare Tire ..........9-67

Jump StartingJump Starting ...................9-68

TowingTowing Your Vehicle .........9-72Recreational VehicleTowing ............................9-72

Towing a Trailer ................9-72

Appearance CareInterior Cleaning ................9-72Exterior Cleaning ..............9-75Sheet Metal Damage ........9-78Finish Damage ..................9-79Underbody Maintenance ....9-79Chemical Paint Spotting ....9-79Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials .........................9-80

ServiceFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer/retailer. You willreceive genuine Saturn partsand Saturn-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine Saturn parts have one ofthese marks.

9-2 Vehicle Service and Care

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’sperformance and safety, includingsuch things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systems likeantilock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby warranty.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on your vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorizeyour vehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask for

GM Accessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-35.

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle),many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.


Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and yourvehicle could be damaged ifyou try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enoughabout it.• Be sure you have sufficient

knowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use thewrong fasteners, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If you want to do some of your ownservice work, you should use theproper service manual. It tellsyou much more about how toservice your vehicle than thismanual can. To order the properservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 11-14.

Your vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do yourown service work, see AirbagSystem Check on page 1-36.

You should keep a record with allparts receipts and list the mileageand the date of any service workyou perform. See “MaintenanceRecord” in the Limited Warranty,Maintenance and Owner AssistanceInformation manual.

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the VehicleThings you might add to the outsideof your vehicle can affect theairflow around it. This can causewind noise and can affect fueleconomy and windshield washerperformance. Check with yourdealer/retailer before addingequipment to the outside of yourvehicle.


Owner Checks

{ CAUTION

An electric fan under the hoodcan start up and injure youeven when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing,and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hotengine parts and start a fire.These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber.You or others could be burned.Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto ahot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle that is locatedunder the instrument panel.

2. Push the secondary hoodrelease lever upward.

3. Lift the hood.

After the hood is slightly lifted, it willcontinue to open to the full position.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure. Pull the hood down,close it firmly.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, this is what you will see:


A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 9-11.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. Engine Oilon page 9-7.

C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. Brakeson page 9-22.

D. Coolant Reservoir. CoolingSystem on page 9-16.

E. Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap.Pressure Cap on page 9-15.

F. Engine Compartment Fuse Blockon page 9-34.

G. Battery on page 9-25.H. Windshield Washer Fluid on

page 9-20.I. Engine Oil Dipstick. Engine Oil

on page 9-7.

Engine Oil

If the low oil level light appears onthe instrument cluster, checkthe engine oil level right away.See Low Oil Level Light onpage 4-23. You should check theengine oil level regularly; this is justa reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check theengine oil every time you get fuel.In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and thevehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for the location of the engine oildipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If you do notdo this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull the dipstick and clean it witha paper towel or cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip downand check the level.


When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is below the MIN (minimum)mark, add at least one quart/liter ofthe recommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specifications onpage 10-2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the properoperating range, the enginecould be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. If you are in an areaof extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below−20°F (−29°C), use either anSAE 5W-30 synthetic oil oran SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and betterprotection for the engine atextremely low temperatures.These numbers on an oilcontainer show its viscosity, orthickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.


• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburst symbolon the container. This symbolindicates that the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GM StandardGM6094M and showing theAmerican Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered byyour warranty.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils withthe starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all youneed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer systemthat lets you know when to changethe engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutionsand engine temperature, and noton mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which anoil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, youmust reset the system everytime the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itwill indicate that an oil changeis necessary. The letters InSP willappear in the odometer display.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the mileage indicated onthe display. If you are driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is necessary once ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who willperform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, you must change theoil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs whereyou change the oil prior to theletters InSP appearing in theodometer display, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil,reset the system:

1. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

2. Press the instrument panelcluster stem until the odometeris displayed.

3. Press and hold the clusterstem until the letters InSPare displayed.

4. Hold the cluster stem down andturn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

5. The letters InSP in the instrumentpanel cluster display will flash.

6. Keep the cluster stem down forat least 20 seconds and thenrelease the stem.

If the letters InSP and the remainingmileage for the next oil changeappear in the instrument panelcluster display, the system isproperly reset.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer’s warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.


Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See “Schedule Maintenance”in Service and Maintenance for

more information. If you are drivingin dusty/dirty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

1. Remove the screws that holdthe cover on.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the cover and reconnectthe electrical connector.

{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with theair cleaner/filter off can causeyou or others to be burned.The air cleaner not only cleansthe air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is notthere and the engine backfires,you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be carefulworking on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filteris off, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.


Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soonas possible.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in the MaintenanceSchedule. See “AdditionalRequired Services” in Serviceand Maintenance. Be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed in“Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in Service andMaintenance.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be

covered by your warranty.See “Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the LimitedWarranty, Maintenance and OwnerAssistance Information manual.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soonas possible. You may also haveyour fluid level checked byyour dealer/retailer when you haveyour oil changed. See “Part D:Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in Service andMaintenance for the proper fluidto use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage inyour vehicle is self-adjusting.This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid fromthe brake master cylinder reservoir.See Brakes on page 9-22 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km),whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant.

The following explains your coolingsystem and how to add coolantwhen it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating on page 9-15.


A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant will:• Give freezing protection down

to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust andcorrosion.

• Help keep the proper enginetemperature.

• Let the warning lights and gageswork as they should.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean,drinkable water and one-halfDEX-COOL® coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If youuse this coolant mixture, you do notneed to add anything else.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water tothe cooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such asalcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture,the engine could get too hotbut would not get the overheatwarning. The engine couldcatch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, andother parts.

Notice: If you use extrainhibitors and/or additives inyour vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed inthis manual for the coolingsystem. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants in theMaintenance and LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation manual.


Checking Coolant

The coolant reservoir is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for more informationon location.

{ CAUTION

Turning the coolant reservoirpressure cap when the engineand radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids toblow out and burn you badly.Never turn the coolantreservoir pressure cap - evena little - when the engine andradiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When your engine is cold,the coolant level should be atthe KALT/COLD line.

Do not overfill the coolant reservoir.Too much coolant can result inan overflow condition when thefluid is hot.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add theproper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureat the coolant reservoir, but onlywhen the engine is cool. If thecoolant reservoir is empty, a specialfill procedure is necessary. SeeCooling System on page 9-16for instructions on “How to AddCoolant to the Coolant Reservoir.”

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethyleneglycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough.Do not spill coolant on a hotengine.

When replacing the pressure cap,make sure it is hand-tight andfully seated.


Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap isproperly and tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for more informationon location.

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolanttemperature warning light onyour vehicle’s instrument panel.See Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 4-19 formore information.

If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheatedengine can burn you badly,even if you just open the hood.Stay away from the engine ifyou see or hear steam comingfrom it. Just turn it off andget everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, theliquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if itoverheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven withno coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn engine coolant temperaturewarning can indicate a seriousproblem. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light onpage 4-19.

If you get an engine coolanttemperature warning, but see or hearno steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.


If you get the engine coolanttemperature warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on,turn it off.

2. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (NEUTRAL) whilestopped. If it is safe to do so, pulloff the road, shift to P (PARK)or N (NEUTRAL) and letthe engine idle.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot atthe highest fan speed and openthe windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheatwarning, you can drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower for about10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and youhave not stopped, pull over, stop,and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam,you can idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turnoff the engine and get everyone outof the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hoodbut to get service help right away.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift thehood, this is what you see:

A. Coolant ReservoirB. Coolant Reservoir Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fans

(Out of view)


{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start upeven when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantreservoir is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

The coolant level should be at orabove the KALT/COLD mark on thecoolant reservoir. If it is not, youmay have a leak at the coolantreservoir pressure cap or inthe radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If youdo, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if thereis a leak. If you run the engine,it could lose all coolant.That could cause an enginefire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before youdrive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak,with the engine on, check to seeif the electric engine cooling fans arerunning. If the engine is overheating,both fans should be running.If they are not, your vehicle needsservice.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.


How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Reservoir

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant reservoir. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat or above the KALT/COLDmark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant reservoir,but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant reservoirpressure cap, is cool before youdo it. See Engine Coolant onpage 9-12 for more information.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantreservoir, add coolant as follows:

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquidsfrom a hot cooling system canblow out and burn you badly.They are under pressure,and if you turn the coolantreservoir pressure cap — evena little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system,including the coolant reservoirpressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolantreservoir pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water tothe cooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such asalcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot butyou would not get the overheatwarning. The engine couldcatch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.


{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethyleneglycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough.Do not spill coolant on a hotengine.

1. Remove the coolant reservoirpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantreservoir pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot. Turn the coolantreservoir pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about twoor two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for thatto stop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the coolantreservoir pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant reservoir withthe proper mixture, to theKALT/COLD mark. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check tosee if the level is below themark. If the level is below theKALT/COLD mark, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up tothe mark. Repeat this procedureuntil the level remains constantat the KALT/COLD mark forat least five minutes.

4. With the coolant reservoirpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant reservoir mightbe lower. If the level is lowerthan the KALT/COLD mark,add more of the proper mixtureto the coolant reservoir untilthe level reaches theKALT/COLD mark.

5. Replace the coolant reservoirpressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight andfully seated.

Coolant ReservoirPressure Cap


Power Steering FluidWhen to Check PowerSteering FluidIt is not necessary to check thepower steering fluid level. A powersteering fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take your vehicle to thedealer/retailer service departmentand have it repaired as soonas possible.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operatingyour vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 9-6for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.


Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementFront Windshield WiperWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

See “Maintenance ReplacementParts” in the Limited Warranty,Maintenance and owner AssistanceInformation manual for the propertype and length.

Raise the wiper arm, tilt the wiperblade at a 90° angle to thewiper arm, and remove to the side.

1. Turn the ignition off.

2. With the key in the ignition andkey in the LOCK position, pressthe wiper lever down. Releasethe wiper lever when the wipersare in the vertical position.

3. Raise the wiper arm away fromthe windshield.

4. Turn the wiper blade at a 90°angle to the wiper arm andremove the blade to the side.

5. Install the new wiper blade.

6. Lower the wiper arm on to thewindshield.

Rear Windshield Wiper

1. Lift the wiper arm straight up.

2. Push the wiper blade straight outof the wiper arm to remove.

3. Install the new wiper blade.


BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinder and, onmanual transmission vehicles,the clutch hydraulic system use thesame reservoir. The reservoir isfilled with DOT-4 brake fluid.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to anacceptable level during normalbrake lining wear. When new liningsare put in, the fluid level goesback up. The other reason is thatfluid is leaking out of the brakeor clutch hydraulic system. If it is,

have the brake or clutch hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakesor clutch will not work well.

It is not a good idea to top off thebrake fluid. Adding brake fluidwill not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake or clutchhydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If your vehicle has too muchbrake fluid, it can spill on theengine. The fluid will burn if theengine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, andyour vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake and/orclutch hydraulic system.

Refer to “Scheduled Maintenance”in the Limited Warranty,Maintenance and Owner AssistanceInformation manual to determinewhen to check the brake fluid.

Checking Brake FluidThe brake fluid can be checkedwithout taking off the cap by lookingat the brake fluid reservoir.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have your brakehydraulic system checked to seeif there is a leak. After work is doneon the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above theMIN but not over the MAX mark.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid,use only DOT-4 brake fluid.It is recommended that you flushthe brake hydraulic system andrefill it with new DOT-4 fluidat a regular maintenance serviceevery two years. See “Additional


Required Services” in the LimitedWarranty, Maintenance andOwner Assistance Informationmanual. Use new brake fluidfrom a sealed container only.See “Recommended Fluids andLubricants” in the Limited Warranty,Maintenance and Owner AssistanceInformation manual.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash.Always use the proper brakefluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a few dropsof mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If youdo, wash it off immediately.See Exterior Cleaning onpage 9-75.

Brake WearYour vehicle has disc brakes.

Notice: Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.

Front disc brake pads have built-inbrake pad wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning soundwhen the brake pads are wornand new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time your vehicle ismoving, except when you arepushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could leadto an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound,have your vehicle serviced.


Rear disc brake pads do not havebuilt-in brake pad wear indicators.Periodic visual inspection of the rearbrake pads is required to determinewhen to replace the pads. Visuallyinspect the rear brake padswhenever the rear wheels areremoved such as during tire rotation.

1. Set the parking brake and makesure that the brakes have beengiven enough time to cool.

2. Remove the rear wheels.

3. Visually inspect the rear brakeinner pads (C) at each rearwheel through the inspectionwindow in the brake caliper (A).

Brake pads should be replacedwhen the inner pad (C) isworn to 5/64 in (2 mm) of padthickness (B). New brakepads, with no wear, are 25/64 ofan inch (10 mm) thick.

4. After brake pad inspection orreplacement, install the rearwheels.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel bolts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel bolts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacitiesand Specifications on page 10-2.

Brake linings should alwaysbe replaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop,the disc brakes adjust for wear.


Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicleis complex. Its many parts have tobe of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. Your vehiclewas designed and tested withtop-quality brake parts. When youreplace parts of the brakingsystem — for example, when thebrake linings wear down andyou need new ones put in — besure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not,the brakes might not work properly.For example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong foryour vehicle, the balance betweenthe front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. Thebraking performance you havecome to expect can change in manyother ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenancefree battery. When it is timefor a new battery, see yourdealer/retailer for one that has thereplacement number shown onthe original battery’s label.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 9-6 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals,and related accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that canburn you and gas that canexplode. You can be badly hurtif you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 9-68 for tipson working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If you drive yourvehicle infrequently, remove theblack, negative (−) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of your vehicle, remove theblack, negative (−) cable fromthe battery or use a battery tricklecharger. This will help maintainthe charge of the battery over anextended period of time.


Headlamp AimingThe optical headlamp aiming systemhas been preset at the factoryand should need no furtheradjustment.

However, If the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aimmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may also meanthe vertical aim needs to be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicleis taken to your dealer/retailer forservice if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, tore-aim the headlamps as described.

The vehicle should:• Be placed so the headlamps

are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• Have all four tires on a perfectlylevel surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

• Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall.

• Not have any snow, ice, ormud on it.

• Be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being done.

• Have a full tank of fuel andone person or 160 lbs (75 kg)on the driver seat.

• Have all tires properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle’s low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim onthe headlamps:

1. Open the hood. See HoodRelease on page 9-5 for moreinformation.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low-beam headlamp.


3. Record the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow-beam headlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance from Step 3and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlampsand place a piece of cardboardor equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted.Do not place it directly onthe headlamp. This allows onlythe beam of light from theheadlamp being adjusted tobe seen on the flat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.The adjustment screw can beturned with a 6 mm socketwrench.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam is aimedto the horizontal tape line. Turn itclockwise or counterclockwiseto raise or lower the angle ofthe beam.


9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A)shows the correct headlamp aim.The lamp on the right (B) showsthe incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 9-33.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs havepressurized gas inside and canburst if you drop or scratch thebulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions on thebulb package.

Front Turn Signal Lamps

1. The bulbs of the turn signal lampare replaced through openings inthe front wheel wells. Turn thewheel to gain access to the pushtabs and remove the cover.


2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pullstraight out.

3. Turn bulb counterclockwiseand remove.

4. Install new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 toreinstall.

Taillamps(Five-Door Hatchback)

A. Backup LampB. TaillampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn

Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate.

2. To replace the bulbs on thedriver side, turn both locksand remove the cover.

To replace the bulbs on thepassenger side, turn the lockclockwise and remove the cover.

3. Detach the plug connectorfrom the bulb assembly.


4. Turn the nuts counterclockwiseand hold the outside of taillampassembly.

5. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight out.

6. Remove the three nuts.

7. Press on the tabs on the outsideof bulb assembly and remove thebulb assembly.

8. Remove the bulb from the bulbassembly.

9. Install a new bulb withouttouching the glass.

10. Reinstall the bulb assembly intaillamp assembly.

11. Make sure the seals are appliedto the taillamp assembly andscrews.

12. Insert the taillamp assemblyinto the body.

13. Reinstall the three nuts.

14. Attach the plug connector to thebulb assembly.

Taillamps(Three-Door Hatchback)

A. Backup LampB. TaillampC. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn

Signal Lamp


To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate onpage 2-6 for more information.

2. Detach the plug connector fromthe bulb assembly.

3. Turn the nuts counterclockwiseand hold the outside of taillampassembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assemblystraight out.

5. Remove the seal.

6. Press on the tabs on outside ofbulb assembly and remove thebulb assembly.

7. Remove the bulb from the bulbassembly.

8. Install a new bulb withouttouching the glass.

9. Reinstall the bulb assembly intaillamp assembly.

10. Make sure the seals are appliedto the taillamp assembly andscrews.

11. Insert the taillamp assemblyinto the body.

12. Reinstall the three nuts.

13. Attach the plug connector to thebulb assembly.


License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push tab in and pull down on it toremove the license plate lamp.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp toward you through theopening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lamp.


Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Front TurnSignal Lamp 3157 NAK

License PlateLamp W5W

Parking Lamp 4157KTaillamp W21

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.

Electrical System

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to your vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle and thedamage would not be covered byyour warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keepother components from workingas they should.

Add-on equipment can drain yourvehicle’s battery, even if your vehicleis not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to your vehicle, seeServicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-34.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protectedby fuses in the fuse block.An electrical overload will causethe lamps to turn off. If this happens,have your headlamp wiring checkedright away.


Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor isprotected by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow, etc., the wiperwill stop until the motor cools.If the overload is caused by someelectrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows andOther Power OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse blockprotect the power windows andother power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, thecircuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureto replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

There are two fuse blocks inyour vehicle: one in the enginecompartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller locatedon the rear compartment fuse block.See Rear Compartment FuseBlock on page 9-36. It can be usedto easily remove fuses from thefuse block.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located in the front left side ofthe engine compartment. EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9-6.

To open the fuse block cover,insert a tool into the latch and turn.Pull up on the cover to remove.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components onyour vehicle may damage it.Always keep the covers on anyelectrical component.


Fuses Usage

1 Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) Valves

2 ABS Pump

Fuses Usage

4 Climate ControlSystem (Ignition)

5 Engine CoolingFan (AT and AC only)

Fuses Usage

6 Engine Cooling Fan

7 Windshield & LiftgateGlass Washer Motor


Fuses Usage

8 Horn

10 Door Locks

13 Foglamps

14 Windshield Wipers(high speed)

15 Windshield Wipers(low speed)

16 Antilock Brake System,Brake Lamp Switch

17 Vacuum Pump

18 Starter

20 Air Conditioning Clutch

21Engine ControlModule (ECM)(Main Relay)

22 ECM (Battery)

24 Fuel Pump/Injectors

Fuses Usage

26 ECM (Sensor andActuators)

27 Power Steering

28 AutomaticTransmission (Battery)

29 AutomaticTransmission (Ignition)

30 ECM (Ignition)

32 Brake Switch

34 Steering ColumnModule

35 Radio

36OnStar™ Module/OnStar™ InterfaceModule/Display

Rear Compartment FuseBlockTo open the liftgate, See Liftgate onpage 2-6.

The rear compartment fuse block islocated on the left side of thecargo area behind a cover.


Use the fuse puller, to remove and replace fuses.

Fuses Usage

1 Front Power Window

3 Cluster

Fuses Usage

4 Climate ControlSystem (Battery)

11 Rear Defogger

Fuses Usage

12 Rear Windshield Wiper

14 Climate ControlSystem (Ignition)


Fuses Usage

16 Front Passenger SeatDetection Sensor

17

Tire PressureMonitoringSystem (TPMS)/Rain Sensor/InsideRearview Mirror

18 Interior Lights

21 Outside Mirror Heating

22 Sunroof

23 Rear Power Window

24 Diagnostic LinkConnector

29 Accessory PowerOutlet (APO)

34 Sunroof

38 Door Locks

39 Seat Heating Driver

40 Seat Heating FrontPassenger

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer.If you ever have questions aboutthe tire warranty and where toobtain service, see the “LimitedWarranty, Maintenance andOwner Assistance Information”manual for details.

{ CAUTION

• Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

• Overloading your tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.You could have an air-outand a serious accident.See Loading the Vehicleon page 8-30.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires.The resulting accidentcould cause seriousinjury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when your tiresare cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 9-46.

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your treadis badly worn, or if yourtires have been damaged,replace them.

See High-Speed Operationon page 9-47 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh speed driving.

Low-Profile Tires

If the vehicle has 225/40ZR18or 215/45R18 size tires, theyare classified as low-profileperformance tires. These tiresare designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement.You may also notice moreroad noise with low-profileperformance tires and that theytend to wear faster.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow-profile tires, they aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact withroad hazards like, potholes,or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb.The vehicle warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and,when possible avoid contactwith curbs, potholes, andother road hazards.

Winter TiresIf the vehicle has 225/40ZR18 or215/45R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performancetires. These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wet or drypavement. If you expect to driveon snow or ice covered roads often,you may want to get winter tiresfor your vehicle. All season tiresprovide good overall performance onmost surfaces but they may notoffer the traction you would like orthe same level of performanceas winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased traction onsnow and ice covered roads.With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertire tread life. After switching towinter tires, be alert for changes invehicle handling and braking.


See your dealer/retailer for detailsregarding winter tire availabilityand proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 9-54.

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

• Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as your originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W,Y and ZR speed rated tires.If you choose winter tires with alower speed rating, never exceedthe tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples below showa typical passenger vehicletire and a compact sparetire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description.See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample


(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9-56.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 50 mph(80 km/h). The compactspare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire haslost air and gone flat. If yourvehicle has a compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 9-67 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 9-60.

(C) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The letters andnumbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

Compact Spare Tire Example


(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 60 psi (420 kPa). For moreinformation on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - TirePressure on page 9-46.

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T asthe first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tireengineered to standards set bythe U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.


(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description:These characters represent theload range and speed ratingof the tire. The load indexrepresents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified tocarry. The load index can rangefrom 1 to 279. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cords maybe made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in atire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tirehas built up heat from driving.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-46.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standardand optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.


DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Loading the Vehicleon page 8-30.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle.See Loading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum InflationPressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tirecan be inflated. The maximumair pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg). See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 8-30.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted ona vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding thatis higher or deeper than thesame moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.


Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucksand multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 9-46 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 8-30.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 9-53.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire’s traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 9-56.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg) plus therated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 8-30.

Vehicle Maximum Load onthe Tire: Load on an individualtire due to curb weight,accessory weight, occupantweight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” underLoading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.


Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under-inflation),you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from

road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amountof air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 8-30.How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never loadyour vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget tocheck the compact spare tire, itshould be at 60 psi (420 kPa).For additional informationregarding the compact sparetire, see Compact Spare Tire onpage 9-67.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated evenwhen they are under-inflated.Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires arecold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no morethan 1 mile (1.6 km).


Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press thetire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{ CAUTION

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph(160 km/h) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tirefailure. You could have a crashand you or others could bekilled. Some high-speed ratedtires require inflation pressureadjustment for high speedoperation. When speed limitsand road conditions are suchthat a vehicle can be driven athigh speeds, make sure thetires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellentcondition, and set to the correctcold tire inflation pressure forthe vehicle load.

If the vehicle has P205/55R16 sizetires, additional air pressure isrequired when driving the vehicle atspeeds of 99 mph (158 km/h) orhigher. Set the cold tire inflationpressure to the maximum inflationpressure shown on the tire sidewall,or 32 psi (220 kPa), whichever islower. See the example following.

Example:

The maximum load and inflationpressure is molded on the tire’ssidewall, in small letters, near therim flange. It reads somethinglike this: Maximum load 710 kg(1565 lbs) 350 kPa (51 psi) Max.Press.

For this example, the cold tireinflation pressure for high-speeddriving should be set at 32 psi(220 kPa).


When high-speed driving ends,return the tire pressure to therecommended cold inflationpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 8-30.Tire pressure should be checkedand correctly set when the tires arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 9-46.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’s tiresand transmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped witha tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.


When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 9-50 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) operates on a radiofrequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not causeharmful interference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.

The TPMS operates on a radiofrequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and ScienceCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.



Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, excluding thespare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in thevehicle’s tires and transmit tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warninglight located in the instrumentpanel cluster.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycleuntil the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure in the tire(s) aregetting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.

You must begin driving before theTPMS system is operational.TPMS sensors need to be installedonto the full-size tire and wheelassemblies, and the tires adjustedto the manufacturers’ recommendedtire pressure amount.

A Tire and Load Information label isattached to the vehicle, and showsthe size of the vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Loading theVehicle on page 8-30, for an

example of the Tire and LoadInformation label and its location onthe vehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 9-46.

The vehicle’s TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 9-51 and Tireson page 9-38.

Notice: Liquid tire sealantscould damage the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS) sensors.Sensor damage caused byusing a tire sealant is not coveredby your warranty. Do not useliquid tire sealants.

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any timeyou replace one or more of theTPMS sensors or rotate thevehicle’s tires, the identificationcodes are automatically learned bythe TPMS. This occurs within afew moments of driving the vehicleover 19 mph (31 km/h).


TPMS Malfunction LightThe TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMSsensors are missing or inoperable.When the system detects amalfunction, the low tire warninglight flashes for about one minuteand then stays on for the remainderof the ignition cycle. Some of theconditions that can cause themalfunction light to come on are:

• One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message should gooff once you re-install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

• One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The TPMSmalfunction light should go offafter the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the vehicle isdriven for a few moments over19 mph (31 km/h). See yourdealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match the vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for the vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 9-54.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight comes on and stays on.

Tire Inspection andRotationInspect tires regularly for signs ofwear or damage. Also inspect thespare tire. For more informationon tire inspection, see When It IsTime for New Tires on page 9-53.

Rotating vehicle tires helps themto wear evenly and keeps thevehicle performing like it didwhen tires were new.

Rotate the tires and checkwheel alignment approximatelyevery 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km) or whenunusual tire wear is noted.See “Scheduled Maintenance”in the Index of the “LimitedWarranty, Maintenanceand Owner AssistanceInformation” manual for moreinformation. Also check thewheels for damage, see WheelReplacement on page 9-58for more information.


Use this pattern when rotatingthe vehicle tires. Do not includethe compact spare tire in thetire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, oron the parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelbolts become loose aftertime. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenyou change a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from placeswhere the wheel attaches tothe vehicle using a scraperor wire brush.

Installing wheels with a goodmetal-to-metal contact atthe mounting surfaces isnecessary to prevent wheelbolts from becoming loose.

To prevent corrosion or rustbuild-up, lightly coat the wheelhub center and the cone-shapedsurface of each wheel boltwith wheel bearing grease,after a wheel change.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 9-60 for informationon installing the tire and wheelassembly. Also see “WheelBolt Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications on page 10-2.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended cold tireinflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 9-46 andLoading the Vehicle onpage 8-30.


When It Is Time forNew TiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading,and road conditions influencewhen you need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which will appear whenthe tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not beingused. This is also true for thespare tire, if the vehicle has one.Multiple conditions affect howfast this aging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out beforethey degrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.


Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommendsthat you get tires with the sameTPC Spec rating. This way,your vehicle will continue to havetires that are designed to givethe same performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, asthe original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle,including brake system performance,ride and handling, traction control,

and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’ssidewall near the tire size. If the tireshave an all-season tread design,the TPC Spec number will befollowed by an MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 9-40 for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tires willhelp keep your vehicle performingmost like it did when the tires werenew. Replacing less than a fullset of tires can affect the brakingand handling performance ofyour vehicle. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 9-51 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you couldhave a crash. Using tiresof different sizes, brands,or types may also causedamage to the vehicle.Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tireson all wheels. It is all rightto drive with the compactspare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on thevehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 9-67.


{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires onthe vehicle, the wheel rimflanges could develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’stires with those that do not havea TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias-belted tires) asyour vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could givean inaccurate low-pressure warningif non-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle. Non-TPCSpec rated tires may give alow-pressure warning that is higheror lower than the proper warning

level you would get with TPC Specrated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 9-48.

Your vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 8-30,for more information about theTire and Loading Information Labeland its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tiresand WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as, anti-lockbrakes, traction control, andstability control, the performance ofthese systems can be affected.

{ CAUTION

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tiresnot recommended for thosewheels are selected. You mayincrease the chance that youwill crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saturn specificwheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed bya Saturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 9-54and Accessories and Modificationson page 9-3 for additionalinformation.


Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed bythe United States NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear,traction, and temperatureperformance. This applies onlyto vehicles sold in the UnitedStates. The grades are molded

on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The UniformTire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), orto some limited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General MotorsTire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practices,and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

{WARNING

The traction grade assignedto this tire is based onstraight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds toa level of performance whichall passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

{WARNING

The temperature gradefor this tire is establishedfor a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately orin combination, can causeheat buildup and possibletire failure.


Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on yourvehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to giveyou the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, if you noticeunusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other,the alignment might need tobe checked. If you notice yourvehicle vibrating when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked or badly rusted or corroded.If the wheel bolts keep comingloose, the wheel and wheel boltsshould be replaced. If the wheelleaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels or wheel bolts, replacethem only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you willbe sure to have the right wheeland wheel bolts for the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels or wheel bolts on yourvehicle can be dangerous.It could affect the braking andhandling of the vehicle, makethe tires lose air and make youlose control of the vehicle. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheeland wheel bolts for replacement.


Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 9-60 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. Youcannot know how it has beenused or how far it has beendriven. It could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. If you haveto replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tirechains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension orother vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chainscould cause you to lose controlof the vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use onthe vehicle and tire sizecombination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions.To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjustor remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle, and donot spin the vehicle’s wheels.If you do find traction devicesthat will fit, install them on thefront tires.


Tire Changing

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle’s tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction youwould use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the

way you want the vehicle to go.It may be very bumpy and noisy, butyou can still steer. Gently brake toa stop, well off the road if possible.

{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack providedwith your vehicle is designedonly for changing a flat tire. If itis used for anything else, you orothers could be badly injured orkilled if the vehicle slips off thejack. Use the jack provided withyour vehicle only for changing aflat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next partshows how to use the jackingequipment to change a flat tiresafely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on thehazard warning flashers.

{ CAUTION

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallon you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured oreven killed. Find a level placeto change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brakefirmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine anddo not restart while thevehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be certain the vehicle willnot move, put blocks at thefront and rear of the tirefarthest away from the onebeing changed. That would bethe tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, place thewheel block at the tire diagonallyacross from the flat tire.

Removing the Spare Tireand ToolsThe equipment you will need islocated in the rear storage area.

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate onpage 2-6.

2. Lift the floor cover to access thespare tire and tools.

3. Remove the foam pad. Turn theretainer counterclockwise toremove it.

4. Remove the spare tire by pullingit up and out of the trunk.


5. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire.

6. The tools you will be usinginclude the jack (A), wheelwrench (B) and jack handle (C).

Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire1. If your vehicle has wheel covers,

remove the cover.Do not try to put a wheel coveron your compact spare tire. It willnot fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flattire repaired or replaced.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle’s compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

2. If your vehicle has wheel boltcaps, remove the caps. Storethe caps with the wheel cover.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel bolts. Do notremove them yet.


Notice: Make sure that thejack lift head is in the correctposition or you may damage yourvehicle. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flattire. The location is indicated bya mark on the bottom edgeof the vehicle.

5. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under avehicle when it is supportedonly by a jack.

{ CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury andvehicle damage, be sure to fitthe jack lift head into theproper location before raisingthe vehicle.


6. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the compact spare tire tofit under the vehicle.

7. Remove all of the wheel bolts.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheel boltsbecome loose after time. Thewheel could come off andcause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, youcan use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changing aFlat Tire on page 9-60.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.Installing wheels with a goodmetal-to-metal contact atthe mounting surface isnecessary to prevent the wheelbolts from becoming loose.To prevent corrosion or rustbuild-up, apply a light coat ofwheel bearing grease to thewheel hub center and to thecone-shaped surface of eachwheel bolt at every wheel change.


9. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.

10. Reinstall the wheel bolts withthe rounded end of the boltstoward the wheel. Tighten eachbolt by hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning thejack handle counterclockwise.Lower the jack completely.

12. Tighten the wheel bolts firmlyin a crisscross sequence,as shown.

{ CAUTION

Incorrect or improperlytightened wheel bolts cancause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This couldlead to a crash. If you have to

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

replace them, be sure to getnew original equipment wheelbolts. Stop somewhere assoon as you can and have thebolts tightened with a torquewrench to the proper torquespecification. See Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 10-2 for wheel bolttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel bolts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel boltsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 10-2 for the wheel bolttorque specification.


Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools

{ CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehiclecould cause injury. In asudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strikesomeone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store a flat or spare tire andtools, do the following:

A. JackB. Wheel WrenchC. Jack Handle

1. Replace the jack and toolsas shown.

2. Place the flat tire face down intothe spare tire hub.

3. Turn spare tire hold-down bolt byturning clockwise. Return thefoam pad to its original position.


4. Put the load floor back in place.

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tirewas fully inflated when the vehiclewas new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflationpressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soonas possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to50 mph (80 km/h) for distancesup to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so youcan finish your trip and have thefull-size tire repaired or replaced atyour convenience. Of course, itis best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer andbe in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takeyour vehicle through anautomatic car wash with guiderails. The compact spare can getcaught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, andmaybe other parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheelsor tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will notfit your compact spare. Usingthem can damage your vehicleand can damage the chainstoo. Do not use tire chains onyour compact spare.


Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following stepsto do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. Theycan be dangerous because:• They contain acid that can

burn you.• They contain gas that can

explode or ignite.• They contain enough

electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage toyour vehicle that would notbe covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could causea ground connection you do notwant. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P)or a manual transmission inNEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by yourwarranty. Always turn off yourradio and other accessories whenjump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not needed.This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!


4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries. Find the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. Yourvehicle’s positive (+) terminalis identified by “+” sign on batterycase or terminal. EngineCompartment Overview onpage 9-6.

{ CAUTION

An electric fan can start upeven when the engine is notrunning and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a batterycan cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be surethe right amount of fluid isthere. If it is low, add water totake care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could bepresent.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly.Keep your hands away frommoving parts once the engineis running.


5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.Before you connect the cables,here are some things you toknow. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will goto the engine lift hook.Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will geta short that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but notnear engine parts that move.Connect it to the engine lift hook.You may need to scrape thesurface with your jumper cableto obtain a proper ground.The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.


10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cablesdo not touch each other orother metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.

Jumper Cable Removal


Towing

Towing Your VehicleThe vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with any ofits wheels on the ground.

Consult your dealer/retailer or aprofessional towing service ifthe disabled vehicle needs to betowed. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 11-5.

Notice: Dolly towing or dinghytowing your vehicle maycause damage because ofreduced ground clearance.Always put your vehicle on aflatbed truck.

Recreational VehicleTowingNotice: Dolly towing or dinghytowing your vehicle maycause damage because ofreduced ground clearance.Always put your vehicle on aflatbed trailer.

The vehicle was neither designednor intended to be towed with anyof its wheels on the ground.

Towing a TrailerThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningYour vehicle’s interior will continueto look its best if it is cleanedoften. Although not always visible,dust and dirt can accumulateon your upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuumingis recommended to remove particlesfrom the upholstery. It is importantto keep your upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavilysoiled. Soils should be removed asquickly as possible. Your vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains toset rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning. Use carebecause newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer colorto your vehicle’s interior.


When cleaning your vehicle’sinterior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned. Permanentdamage may result from usingcleaners on surfaces for which theywere not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove anyaccidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To preventover-spray, apply cleaner directly tothe cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasivecleaners when cleaning glasssurfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/orcause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glasson your vehicle, use only a softcloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solventsthat may become concentrated inyour vehicle’s breathing space.

Before using cleaners, read andadhere to all safety instructions onthe label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening yourvehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a productfor cleaning your vehicle’s glass.You can also obtain a product fromyour dealer/retailer to removeodors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle usingthe following cleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any othersharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to your vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressurecan damage the interior and doesnot improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residuethat leaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interiormay result from the use ofmany organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.


Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floormats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or clubsoda. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the followingtechniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb intothe paper towel until no morecan be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean, use the followinginstructions:1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white

cloth with water or club soda.2. Wring the cloth to remove excess

moisture.3. Start on the outside edge of the

soil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used withplain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner orspot lifter may be necessary.When a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter is to be used,

test a small hidden area forcolorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with watercan be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry.Never use steam to clean leather.Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently


change the appearance and feelof your leather and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents to cleanyour vehicle’s interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish onleather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces.

Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearanceand feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not usesilicone or wax-based products, orthose containing organic solvents toclean your vehicle’s interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on your instrumentpanel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections inthe windshield and even makeit difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Exterior CleaningCleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water,a soft cloth and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “WashingYour Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof your vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. You can getapproved cleaning products fromyour dealer/retailer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materialson page 9-80.


If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on yourvehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces.Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that aremarked safe for painted surfaces toremove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. Youcan help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehiclegaraged or covered wheneverpossible.

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water oruse chrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all brightmetal parts.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve yourvehicle’s finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on yourvehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on your vehicleor damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon your vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on


80. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm)to the surface of the vehicle.Use of power washers exceeding1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may be required.See “Fluids and Lubricants” in theIndex of the “Maintenance andWarranty and Owner assistanceInformation” manual.

Wheels and Trim — Aluminumor ChromeYour vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap and water.Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed with

magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash your vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, youcould damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Use only approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-platedwheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of yourvehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.


Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chromewheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: If you drive your vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you coulddamage the aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by yourwarranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash thewindshield thoroughly when cleaningthe blades. Bugs, road grime,sap, and a buildup of vehiclewash/wax treatments may causewiper streaking. Replace thewiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on yourvehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired or replacedto restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintainingthe vehicle warranty.


Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damagecan be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor pan, andexhaust system even though theyhave corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior polishing cloth.

Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil, and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome or stainless steel.

White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks fromwhitewalls and raised white lettering.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke andfingerprints.

Chrome Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grime fromchrome wheels.

Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints, andsurface contaminants. Spray on andwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks, fine scratches,and other light surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches andprotects finish.


Description Usage

Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans, shines, and protects tires.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes. Biodegradableand phosphate free.

Spot Lifter Quickly removes spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor eliminator usedon fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet.


✍ NOTES


Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ..................10-1

Service PartsIdentification Label ...........10-1

Capacities andSpecificationsCapacities andSpecifications ..................10-2

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for yourvehicle. It appears on a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the driver side. It can be seenthrough the windshield from outsidethe vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and the certificates oftitle and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This code helpsidentify the vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 10-2 for your vehicle’sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the trunk floor.It is very helpful if you ever needto order parts. The label hasthe following information:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Technical Data 10-1

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in theindex of the “Limited Warranty, Maintenance and Owner Assistance Information” manual.

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

Automatic Transmission 6.2 qt 5.9 L

Manual Transmission 7.3 qt 6.9 L

Engine Oil with Filter 4.8 qt 4.5 L

Fuel Tank 11.9 gal 45.0 L

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission 4.2 qt 4.0 L

Manual Transmission 1.6 qt 1.5 L

Wheel Bolt Torque 81 lb ft 110 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

10-2 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.8L L4 1 AutomaticManual 0.035 in (0.90 mm)

Technical Data 10-3

✍ NOTES

10-4 Technical Data

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure .......................11-1

Online Owner Center ........11-4Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users ..............................11-4

Customer AssistanceOffices ............................11-5

GM MobilityReimbursementProgram ..........................11-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram ..........................11-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments ..................11-8

Courtesy Transportation ....11-8Collision DamageRepair ...........................11-10

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ...................11-13

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment ...................11-14

Reporting Safety Defectsto Saturn .......................11-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ......11-14

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ...................11-15

Event Data Recorders .....11-16OnStar® ..........................11-17Navigation System ...........11-17Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) .......11-17

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your retailer and toSaturn. Together we are committedto providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during,and after the purchase of aSaturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the SaturnDifference. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle are resolvedby the retailer’s sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, yourownership experience falls belowyour expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the RetailCustomer Assistance Liaison. Anymember of the retail managementteam has the authority and thedesire to resolve your concerns.Normally, concerns can be quicklyresolved at this level.

Customer Information 11-1

STEP TWO: Should you needadditional assistance, in the U.S.,contact the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999. A SaturnCustomer Assistance Center teammember will handle your call andassist in providing product andwarranty information, the nearestretailer location, roadside assistance,brochures, literature and discuss anyconcerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Please have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:

• Vehicle Identification Number(VIN). This 17-digit numbercan be found on the vehicleregistration or title, on theupper driver side corner of theinstrument panel, or on yourroadside assistance key card.

• The name of your selling andservicing retail facility.

• Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

• Your daytime and evening phonenumbers.

When contacting Saturn, pleaseremember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggestyou follow Step One first.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):Both Saturn and its retailers arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturnvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, Saturn and its retailers offerthe additional assistance of aneutral party through our voluntaryparticipation in a mediation/arbitration program called BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. This program isavailable at no cost to you, ourcustomer.

Although you may be required toresort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program isfree of charge and your case isgenerally heard within 40 days. If youdo not agree with the decision givenin your case, you can reject it andproceed with any other venue forrelief available to you.

11-2 Customer Information

Contact the BBB Auto Line Programby using the toll-free telephonenumber or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available inall 50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. Saturn Corporation reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation inthe Mediation/Arbitration Program

In the event that you do not feelyour concerns have been addressedafter following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed tobinding arbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days.We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts inmost jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre, 1-800-263-1999, or youmay write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).


Online Owner Center(United States only)This is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicleinformation can be found in oneplace.

The Online Owner Center allowsyou to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information aboutyour specific vehicle, includingtips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’sservice history and maintenanceschedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions andprivileges only available tomembers.

Refer to saturn.com on the web forupdated information and toregister your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofgmcanada.com where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will have access to:− My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save detailssuch as address and phonenumber for each of your preferredGM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive servicereminders and helpful advice onowning and maintaining yourvehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage yourprofile, subscribe to E-Newsand use tools and forms withgreater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within gmcanada.com.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installedspecial TDD (TelecommunicationDevices for the Deaf) equipment inits Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing or speech-impairedcustomer who has access to a TDDor to a conventional Text Telephone(TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000.TTY users in Canada may dial1-800-263-3830.


Customer AssistanceOfficesSaturn encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. If a customer wishes towrite to Saturn, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse you up to$1,000 toward eligible aftermarketdriver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require foryour vehicle such as hand controls,wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limitedperiod of time from the date ofvehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determineyour vehicle’s eligibility, visityour Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call theSaturn Customer CommunicationCentre at 1-800-263-1999.TTY users in Canada may call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor vehicles purchased in theU.S., call 1-800-553-6000; (TextTelephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).

For vehicles purchased in Canada,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Saturnvehicle, you are automaticallyenrolled in the Saturn RoadsideAssistance Program.


Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is forthe vehicle operator, regardless ofownership. In Canada, a persondriving this vehicle without theconsent of the owner is not eligiblefor coverage.

Services ProvidedThe following services are providedin the U.S. and Canada up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first, and, inCanada only, up to a maximumof $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enoughfuel for the vehicle to get tothe nearest service station(approximately $5 Canada).In Canada, service to providediesel may be restricted. Forsafety reasons, propane andother alternative fuels are notprovided through this service.

• Lock-Out Service: Lock-outservice is covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry intoyour vehicle. A remote unlockmay be available if you have anactive OnStar® subscription.To ensure security, the drivermust present personalidentification before lock-outservice is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is alsorequired.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoadway or Highway: Tow tothe nearest Saturn retailer forwarranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling crash.Winch-out assistance is providedwhen the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of aspare tire in good condition, whenequipped and properly inflated,is covered at no charge.

The customer is responsible forthe repair or replacement of thetire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump startis covered at no charge if thevehicle does not start.

• Trip Routing Service (CanadaOnly): Upon request, RoadsideAssistance will send you detailed,computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of eitherthe most direct route or the mostscenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel informationpertaining to your trip.Please allow three weeks beforeyour planned departure date.Trip routing requests are limitedto six per calendar year.


• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance (Canada Only): Inthe event of a warranty relatedvehicle disablement, while enroute and over 250 kilometresfrom the original point ofdeparture, you might qualifyfor trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistancecovers reasonable reimbursementof up to a maximum of $500(Canadian) for (A) meals(maximum of $50/day), (B)lodging (maximum of $100/night),and (C) alternate groundtransportation (maximum of$40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplannedexpense you may incur whilewaiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair order are required.

Once authorization has beengiven, your advisor will helpyou make any necessaryarrangements and explain howto claim for trip interruptionexpense assistance.

• Alternative Service (CanadaOnly): There could be timeswhen Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance.Your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will bereimbursed up to $100 uponsubmission of the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanicalfailures may be covered. However,any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are theresponsibility of the driver.

Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or reimbursement to an

owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims becomeexcessive in frequency or type ofoccurrence.

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistancewhen calling, please provide thefollowing to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentatives:

• Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

• Telephone number of yourlocation

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem


Towing and Road ServiceExclusionsSpecifically excluded from RoadsideAssistance coverage are towingor services for vehicles operated ona non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing causedby a violation of local, Municipal,State, Provincial or Federal law, andmounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or othertraction devices.

Roadside Assistance is not partof or included in the coverageprovided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Saturn and GeneralMotors of Canada Limited reservethe right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time withoutnotification.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call yourdealership/retailer, let them knowthis, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests you tobring the vehicle for service, youare urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingretailers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with the Bumperto Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extendedpowertrain warranty in both the U.S.and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.


Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unable to wait,Saturn helps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending onthe circumstances, your retailer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Retailers mayprovide you with shuttle service toget you to your destination withminimal interruption of your dailyschedule. This includes one-way orround trip shuttle service withinreasonable time and distanceparameters of the retailer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofthe retailer’s shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed bySaturn for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation througha friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your retailer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your retailer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.


Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery retailer. Please contact yourretailer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriateretailer personnel.

Saturn reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collisionparts are your best choice to ensurethat your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain yourGM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle’s originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested foryour vehicle. As a result, theseparts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosionproblems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.


Aftermarket parts are not coveredby your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts are not coveredby that warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage.There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.

Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by using aftermarketcollision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specifyaftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you areinvolved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you areall right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else inyour vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of acrash until all matters have beentaken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you indanger or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary andrequested information to policeand other parties involved inthe crash. Do not discuss yourpersonal condition, mental frameof mind, or anything unrelated tothe crash. This will help guardagainst post-crash legal action.


• If you need roadside assistance,call GM Roadside Assistance.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 11-5 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven,know where the towing servicewill be taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or writedown the driver’s name, theservice’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from yourvehicle before it is towed away.Make sure this includes yourinsurance information andregistration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important informationyou will need from the otherdriver. Things like name, address,phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate,vehicle make, model and modelyear, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance

company and policy number, anda general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurancecompany from the scene of thecrash. They will walk you throughthe information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phoneor go to the police departmentheadquarters the next day andyou can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In somestates/provinces with “no fault”insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especiallytrue if there are no injuries andboth vehicles are drivable.

• Choose a reputable collisionrepair facility for your vehicle.Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, makesure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have tofeel comfortable with their work fora long time.

• Once you have an estimate, readit carefully and make sure youunderstand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If youhave a question, ask for anexplanation. Reputable shopswelcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you havea pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will notbe covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.


Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live withthe repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance companymay initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional,and insist on Genuine GM parts.Remember if your vehicle is leasedyou may be obligated to havethe vehicle repaired with GenuineGM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as cost stays within reasonablelimits.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), in addition to notifyingSaturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it could open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it could order arecall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourretailer or Saturn Corporation.

To contact NHTSA, call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tosafercar.gov; orwrite to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromsafercar.gov.


Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle hasa safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify Saturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, orwrite:

Saturn Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsA variety of publications areavailable to you. Saturn servicemanuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases,specialized tools and equipment arenecessary to complete certainrepairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who eitherhave the training, or wish to gain agreater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publicationsinformation or to order publicationsin the United States, call tollfree 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com toorder on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manualsare available by calling toll free1-800-551-4123.


Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtainproduct bulletins and as describedbelow is applicable only in thefifty U.S. states and the Districtof Columbia, and only for cars andlight trucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) lessthan 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).Copies of individual bulletinsare also at your participating Saturnretailer. You can ask to see them.

In Canada, information relatingto product service bulletins canbe obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailersuseful service bulletins about Saturnproducts. Saturn monitors productperformance in the field. We thenprepare bulletins for servicing ourproducts better. You can get thesebulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects.Some pertain to the proper use andcare of your vehicle. Some describecostly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done ontime with the latest parts, may avoidfuture costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician howto repair a new or unexpectedcondition. Others describe a quickerway to fix your vehicle. They canhelp a technician service yourvehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditionsaffecting a small number of vehicles.Your Saturn retailer or a qualifiedtechnician may have to determineif a specific bulletin applies toyour vehicle. To order Saturnbulletins, call Saturn Publicationsat 1-800-2-SATURN or visitsaturn-publications.com to orderonline.

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment anddeploy airbags in a crash and, if soequipped, to provide antilock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle.These modules may store data tohelp your dealer/retailer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.


Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data relatedto vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type of personallyidentifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement,that have the special equipment, canread the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.


Saturn will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as partof Saturn’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or,as required by law. Data that Saturncollects or receives may also beused for Saturn research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStarTerms and Conditions forinformation on data collection anduse. See also OnStar® Systemon page 4-38 in this manualfor more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such astire pressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inSaturn vehicles does not useor record personal information orlink with any other Saturn systemcontaining personal information.


✍ NOTES


AAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 9-3Accessory Power Outlets ...... 4-10Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-35Additives, Fuel ..................... 8-36Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 9-33Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 9-11Air Conditioning ..................... 7-1Airbag

Passenger StatusIndicator ....................... 4-15

Readiness Light ................ 4-14System, Replacing Parts

After a Crash ................ 1-36Airbag System ..................... 1-23

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-35

Check ............................. 1-36How Does an Airbag

Restrain? ..................... 1-28Servicing Your

Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-34

Airbag System (cont.)What Makes an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 1-28What Will You See After

an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-29When Should an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 1-27Where Are the

Airbags? .............. 1-25, 1-30Antenna, Fixed Mast ............ 6-25Antilock Brake

System (ABS) .................. 8-18Anti-lock Brake, System

Warning Light ................... 4-18Appearance Care

Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 9-79Exterior Cleaning .............. 9-75Finish Damage ................. 9-79Interior Cleaning ............... 9-72Sheet Metal Damage ........ 9-78Underbody Maintenance .... 9-79Vehicle Care/Appearance

Materials ...................... 9-80Appointments, Scheduling

Service ........................... 11-8

Audio System ........................ 6-1Audio Steering Wheel

Controls ....................... 6-24Fixed Mast Antenna .......... 6-25Radio Reception ............... 6-25Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 6-24

Audio System(s) .................... 6-2Automatic Transmission

Fluid ............................... 9-12Operation .......................... 8-5

BBattery ............................... 9-25

Run-Down Protection .......... 5-4Brakes ............................... 9-22

System Warning Light ....... 4-17Braking ............................... 8-17Break-In, New Vehicle ............ 8-2Bulb Replacement ................ 9-28

Front Turn Signal Lamps ... 9-28Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-28Headlamp Aiming .............. 9-26License Plate Lamps ......... 9-32Replacement Bulbs ........... 9-33Taillamps ................. 9-29, 9-30

Buying New Tires ................. 9-54

INDEX i-1

CCalifornia Fuel ..................... 8-35California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements ....... 9-3California Proposition 65

Warning ............................ 9-3Canadian Owners ..................... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 10-2Carbon Monoxide ......... 8-14, 8-27Care, Safety Belts ................ 1-22Cargo Cover ......................... 3-1Cargo Tie Downs ................... 3-1Cautions and Notices ............... iiiChains, Tire ........................ 9-59Charging System Light .......... 4-17Check

Engine Light .................... 4-20Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 9-79Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ..... 1-41Infants and Young

Children ....................... 1-38Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children ....... 1-45

Child Restraints (cont.)Older Children .................. 1-37Securing .................. 1-50, 1-53Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 1-43Cleaning

Exterior ........................... 9-75Interior ............................ 9-72Underbody Maintenance .... 9-79

Climate Control System .......... 7-1Outlet Adjustment ............... 7-4

Clutch, Hydraulic .................. 9-12Collision Damage Repair ..... 11-10Compact Spare Tire ............. 9-67Content Theft-Deterrent .......... 2-9Control of a Vehicle .............. 8-17Coolant

Engine ............................ 9-12Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 4-19Cooling System ................... 9-16Cruise Control ....................... 4-5Cruise Control Light .............. 4-24Cupholders ........................... 3-1

Customer AssistanceInformationCourtesy

Transportation ....... 11-4, 11-8Customer Assistance

Offices ......................... 11-5Customer Satisfaction

Procedure .................... 11-1GM Mobility

ReimbursementProgram ....................... 11-5

Reporting SafetyDefects toSaturn ........................ 11-14

Reporting SafetyDefects to theCanadianGovernment ................ 11-14

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ................ 11-13

Roadside AssistanceProgram ....................... 11-5

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ..... 11-14

i-2 INDEX

DDaytime Running Lamps ......... 5-2Defensive Driving ................. 8-16Delayed Headlamps ............... 5-2Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 9-4Dome Lamps ........................ 5-3Door

Ajar Light ........................ 4-24Locks ............................... 2-5Power Door Locks .............. 2-5Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .................... 4-26DIC Operation and

Displays ............... 4-27, 4-31DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 4-37Driving

At Night .......................... 8-24Before a Long Trip ............ 8-26Defensive ........................ 8-16Drunken .......................... 8-16Highway Hypnosis ............ 8-26

Driving (cont.)Hill and Mountain Roads .... 8-26In Rain and on Wet

Roads ......................... 8-25Rocking Your Vehicle to

Get it Out .................... 8-30Winter ............................. 8-27Winter Mode Light ............ 4-23

EEDR ................................. 11-15Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ............ 9-33Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-34Fuses ............................. 9-34Headlamp Wiring .............. 9-33Power Windows and

Other PowerOptions ........................ 9-34

Rear Compartment FuseBlock ........................... 9-36

Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 9-34

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ............... 9-11Check and Service

Engine SoonLight ............................ 4-20

Coolant ........................... 9-12Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 4-19Engine Compartment

Overview ....................... 9-6Exhaust ........................... 8-14Oil ................................... 9-7Oil Life System .................. 9-9Overheating ..................... 9-15Starting ............................. 8-3

Engine Heater ....................... 8-4Entry Lighting ........................ 5-3Event Data Recorders ......... 11-16Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-22Exterior Lamps ...................... 5-1Exterior Lamps Off

Reminder ........................ 4-24

INDEX i-3

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 9-11Finish Damage .................... 9-79Fixed Mast Antenna ............. 6-25Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 4-4Flash-to-Pass ........................ 4-8Flat Tire .............................. 9-60Flat Tire, Changing ............... 9-60Flat Tire, Storing .................. 9-66Fluid .................................. 9-12

Automatic Transmission ..... 9-12Power Steering ................. 9-20Windshield Washer ........... 9-20

Fog LampFog .................................. 5-2

Fog Lamp Light ................... 4-23Fuel ................................... 8-35

Additives ......................... 8-36California Fuel .................. 8-35Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ..................... 8-38Filling the Tank ................. 8-37Fuels in Foreign

Countries ..................... 8-36

Fuel (cont.)Gage .............................. 4-25Gasoline Octane ............... 8-35Gasoline Specifications ...... 8-35Low Warning Light ............ 4-25

Fuses ................................. 9-34Engine Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-34Rear Compartment

Fuse Block ................... 9-36Windshield Wiper .............. 9-34

GGage

Fuel ................................ 4-25Speedometer ................... 4-13Tachometer ...................... 4-13

GasolineOctane ............................ 8-35Specifications ................... 8-35

Glove Box ............................ 3-1GM Mobility

ReimbursementProgram .......................... 11-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ........ 4-4Head Restraints ..................... 1-5Headlamp

Aiming ............................ 9-26Headlamp Wiring ................. 9-33Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ............. 9-28Daytime Running Lamps ..... 5-2Delayed ............................ 5-2Exterior Lamps ................... 5-1Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-8Front Turn Signal Lamps ... 9-28Halogen Bulbs .................. 9-28High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-8

Heater ................................. 7-1Engine .............................. 8-4

Height Adjuster, Seat .............. 1-2Highbeam On Light .............. 4-24High-Speed Operation,

Tires ............................... 9-47Highway Hypnosis ................ 8-26Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 8-26

i-4 INDEX

HoodRelease ............................ 9-5

Horn .................................... 4-4How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly .......................... 1-12Hydraulic Clutch ................... 9-12

IIgnition Positions ................... 8-2Immobilizer ........................... 2-7Immobilizer Operation ............. 2-8Infants and Young

Children, Restraints ........... 1-38Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 9-46Instrument Panel

Brightness ......................... 5-3Cluster ............................ 4-12Overview ........................... 4-2

JJump Starting ...................... 9-68

KKeyless Entry System ............ 2-3Keys .................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 9-40Lamp

Rear Compartment ............. 5-4Lamps

Dome ............................... 5-3Exterior, Off Reminder ....... 4-24Reading ............................ 5-3

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-17LATCH System

Child Restraints ................ 1-45Replacing Parts After a

Crash .......................... 1-50License Plate Lamps ............ 9-32Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............... 2-6Light

Airbag Readiness ............. 4-14Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 4-18

Light (cont.)Brake System Warning ...... 4-17Charging System .............. 4-17Cruise Control .................. 4-24Door Ajar ......................... 4-24Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 4-19Fog Lamp ........................ 4-23Highbeam On ................... 4-24Low Fuel Warning ............. 4-25Low Oil Level ................... 4-23Malfunction Indicator ......... 4-20Oil Pressure ..................... 4-22Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator ....................... 4-15Safety Belt Reminders ....... 4-14Service Vehicle Soon ........ 4-24StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 4-19Tire Pressure ................... 4-19Winter Driving Mode .......... 4-23

LightingEntry ................................ 5-3

LightsExterior Lamps ................... 5-1Flash-to-Pass ..................... 4-8High/Low Beam Changer ..... 4-8

INDEX i-5

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 8-30Locks

Door ................................. 2-5Power Door ....................... 2-5Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-6

Loss of Control .................... 8-23Low Fuel Warning Light ........ 4-25Lumbar Seat Adjustment ......... 1-3

MMalfunction Indicator Light ..... 4-20Manual Seats ........................ 1-2Manual Transmission

Fluid ............................... 9-12Operation .......................... 8-9

Manual, Using .......................... iiMessage

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 4-37

MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-12Outside ........................... 2-12Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-12

MyGMLink.com .................... 11-4

NNavigation System,

Privacy .......................... 11-17New Vehicle Break-In ............. 8-2Notices and Cautions ............... iii

OOdometer ........................... 4-13Odometers, Trip ................... 4-13Off-Road Recovery ............... 8-22Oil

Engine .............................. 9-7Low Oil Level Light ........... 4-23Pressure Light .................. 4-22

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ..... 9-9Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-37Online Owner Center ............ 11-4OnStar, Privacy .................. 11-17OnStar® System, see

OnStar® Manual ............... 4-38Outlet Adjustment .................. 7-4Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 4-10

OutsideMirrors ............................ 2-12Power Mirrors .................. 2-12

Owner Checks, Service .......... 9-5Owners, Canadian .................... ii

PPaint, Damage ..................... 9-79Park

Shifting Into ..................... 8-11Shifting Out of .................. 8-13

Park Brake .......................... 8-10Parking

Over Things That Burn ...... 8-13Parking Your Vehicle ............ 8-13Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 4-15Passing .............................. 8-23Perchlorate Materials

Requirements, California ...... 9-3Power

Door Locks ........................ 2-5Electrical System .............. 9-34Retained Accessory (RAP) ... 8-3

i-6 INDEX

Power (cont.)Steering Fluid ................... 9-20Windows ......................... 2-10

Pressure Cap ...................... 9-15Privacy ............................. 11-15

Event Data Recorders ..... 11-16Navigation System .......... 11-17OnStar .......................... 11-17Radio Frequency

Identification ................ 11-17

RRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID),Privacy .......................... 11-17

Radio(s) ............................... 6-2Radios

Reception ........................ 6-25Theft-Deterrent ................. 6-24

Reading Lamps ..................... 5-3Rear Compartment Lamp ........ 5-4Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-6

Rear Heated Seats ................ 1-6Rear Seat Operation .............. 1-7Rear Windshield Washer/

Wiper .............................. 4-10Rearview Mirrors .................. 2-12Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-3Recreational Vehicle

Towing ............................ 9-72Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System .................... 2-3Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System,Operation .......................... 2-4

Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire ....................... 9-62

Removing the Spare Tireand Tools ........................ 9-61

Replacement Bulbs .............. 9-33Replacing LATCH

System Parts Aftera Crash ........................... 1-50

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ..... 11-14Saturn ........................... 11-14United States

Government ................ 11-13Restraint System Check

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash ........ 1-36

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts Aftera Crash ....................... 1-23

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) ..................... 8-3

RoadsideAssistance Program .......... 11-5

Rocking Your Vehicleto Get it Out .................... 8-30

Running the VehicleWhile Parked ................... 8-14

INDEX i-7

SSafety Belts .......................... 1-8

Care of ........................... 1-22Check ............................. 1-22How to Wear Safety

Belts Properly ............... 1-12Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-17Reminder Light ................. 4-14Replacing Parts After

a Crash ....................... 1-23Safety Belt Extender ......... 1-22Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy .................... 1-21Seats

Head Restraints ................. 1-5Heated Seats - Rear ........... 1-6Height Adjuster .................. 1-2Lumbar Adjustment ............. 1-3Rear Seat Operation ........... 1-7Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-3

Securing ChildRestraints ................ 1-50, 1-53

Service ................................ 9-2Accessories and

Modifications .................. 9-3Adding Equipment to the

Outside of the Vehicle ..... 9-4California Perchlorate

Materials Requirements .... 9-3California Proposition 65

Warning ......................... 9-3Doing Your Own Work ........ 9-4Engine Soon Light ............ 4-20Owner Checks ................... 9-5Publications Ordering

Information ................. 11-14Vehicle Soon Light ............ 4-24

Service, SchedulingAppointments ................... 12-8

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-34

Sheet Metal Damage ............ 9-78Shifting Into Park ................. 8-11Shifting Out of Park .............. 8-13Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 4-8

Spare TireCompact ......................... 9-67Installing .......................... 9-62Removing ........................ 9-61Storing ............................ 9-66

Specifications, Capacities ...... 10-2Speedometer ....................... 4-13StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 4-19Stabilitrak® System ............... 8-19Starting the Engine ................ 8-3Steering .............................. 8-20Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio .............................. 6-24Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ...... 4-4Storage Areas

Cupholders ........................ 3-1Glove Box ......................... 3-1

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow .......................... 8-29

Sun Visors .......................... 2-11Sunroof .............................. 2-13

i-8 INDEX

TTachometer ......................... 4-13Taillamps .................... 9-29, 9-30Theft-Deterrent, Radio ........... 6-24Theft-Deterrent Systems ......... 2-7

Content Theft-Deterrent ....... 2-9Immobilizer ........................ 2-7Immobilizer Operation ......... 2-8

Tilt Wheel ............................. 4-4Tire

Pressure Light .................. 4-19Tires .................................. 9-38

Buying New Tires ............. 9-54Chains ............................ 9-59Changing a Flat Tire ......... 9-60Compact Spare Tire .......... 9-67Different Size ................... 9-55High-Speed Operation ....... 9-47If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 9-60Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 9-46

Tires (cont.)Inspection and Rotation ..... 9-51Installing the Spare Tire ..... 9-62Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 9-50Pressure Monitor

System ........................ 9-48Removing the Flat Tire ...... 9-62Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 9-61Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 9-66Tire Sidewall Labeling ....... 9-40Tire Terminology and

Definitions .................... 9-43Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 9-56Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 9-58Wheel Replacement .......... 9-58

Tires (cont.)When It Is Time for

New Tires .................... 9-53Winter Tires ..................... 9-39

TowingRecreational Vehicle .......... 9-72Towing a Trailer ................ 9-72Your Vehicle ..................... 9-72

TractionStabilitrak® System ........... 8-19

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ................ 9-12Fluid, Manual ................... 9-12

Transmission Operation,Automatic .......................... 8-5

Transmission Operation,Manual ............................. 8-9

Trip Odometers .................... 4-13Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 4-8Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 4-4

INDEX i-9

UUniform Tire Quality

Grading ........................... 9-56Using this Manual ..................... ii

VVehicle

Control ............................ 8-17Loading ........................... 8-30Parking Your .................... 8-13Running While Parked ....... 8-14Service Soon Light ........... 4-24Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy .................... 11-15

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ................... 10-1Service Parts

Identification Label ......... 10-1Ventilation Adjustment ............. 7-4Visors ................................. 2-11

WWarning Lights, Gages

and Indicators .................. 4-11Warnings

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 4-37

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 4-4Wheels

Alignment and TireBalance ....................... 9-58

Different Size ................... 9-55Replacement .................... 9-58

Where to Put the Restraint .... 1-43Windows ............................. 2-10

Power ............................. 2-10Windshield

Washer ........................... 4-10Washer Fluid .................... 9-20Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 9-21

Windshield (cont.)Wiper Fuses .................... 9-34Wipers .............................. 4-9

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper .............................. 4-10

Winter Driving ...................... 8-27Winter Driving Mode Light ..... 4-23Winter Tires ........................ 9-39

i-10 INDEX

gm owner manualstitle gm owner manuals author eds created date 2/14/2008 1:45:15 pm

Documents